Dodge Automobile 2004 Neon User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION  
PAGE  
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
CONTENTS  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
WARNING!  
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of  
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with  
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is  
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and  
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to  
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-  
tions and recommendations in this manual will help  
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain  
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,  
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-  
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored  
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with  
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be  
aware of all safety warnings.  
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL  
Consult the table of contents to determine which section  
contains the information you desire.  
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer  
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-  
cians and genuine Moparparts, and is interested in  
your satisfaction.  
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a  
complete listing of all subjects.  
Consult the following table for a description of the  
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout  
this owners manual:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
INTRODUCTION  
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS  
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating  
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily  
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures  
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do  
not read this entire manual you may miss important  
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a laser  
etched plate, located on the left front corner of the  
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This  
number also appears on the vehicle registration or title.  
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS  
WARNING!  
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle  
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety  
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2
CONTENTS  
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .13  
To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .13  
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .13  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .14  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .15  
Central Locking/ Unlocking — If Equipped . . . .15  
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . .16  
Child-Protection Door Lock System  
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . .17  
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Horn Chirp Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To Unlock The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .19  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .28  
Lap/ Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .29  
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental  
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Vehicle Theft Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .20  
To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Remote Trunk Lid Release — If Equipped . . . . .21  
Internal Emergency Trunk Lid Release . . . . . . .22  
Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .46  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside  
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make  
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS  
Automatic Transaxle  
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key  
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can  
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask  
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe  
place.  
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift  
knob push button has returned to the out position. Turn  
the key to the OFF position, turn to the lock position, and  
remove the key.  
2
The double sided keys  
may be inserted into the  
locks with either side up.  
Ignition Key Removal  
Manual Transaxle  
Depress and hold the release button located between the  
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-  
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.  
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place  
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-  
rarily in the key cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key  
clockwise slightly, then remove the key as described. If a  
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the  
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but  
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.  
Locking Doors With The Key  
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the  
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the  
key forward. See Section 7, Body Mechanism Lubrication  
of this manual for external lock lubrication.  
WARNING!  
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger-  
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could  
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch  
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector  
lever. Dont leave the keys in the ignition. A child  
could operate power windows, other controls, or  
move the vehicle.  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder  
Opening the drivers door when the key is in the ignition  
switch, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.  
NOTE: With the drivers door open, and the key in the  
ignition, the power door locks will not lock via the  
interior door lock switch.  
CAUTION!  
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always  
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors  
when leaving the vehicle unattended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11  
SENTRY KEY  
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed  
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the  
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.  
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-  
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.  
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of  
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This  
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic  
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that  
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start  
and operate the vehicle.  
2
If the Theft Alarm/ Immobilizer Light comes on during  
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for  
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the  
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as  
possible.  
NOTE:  
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be  
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic  
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or  
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/  
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds  
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a  
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this  
indicates a problem with the electronics.  
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible  
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems  
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of  
security protection.  
Exxon/ Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or  
any other transponder equipped components on the  
same keychain will not cause a key-related (tran-  
sponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-  
cally held against the ignition key being used  
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or  
other RF electronics will not cause interference with  
this system.  
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this  
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the  
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine  
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have  
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.  
Sentry Key Programming  
You can program new keys to the system if you have two  
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:  
Replacement Keys  
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to  
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.  
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the  
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once  
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can  
not be programmed to any other vehicle.  
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and  
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no  
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and  
remove the first key.  
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided  
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required  
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may  
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the  
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure  
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle  
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been  
programmed.  
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition  
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime  
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.  
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.  
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and  
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10  
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light  
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.  
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer  
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the  
dealer.  
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.  
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact  
your dealer for details.  
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering  
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-  
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is rotated no  
more than 1/ 2 turn in either direction and the key is not  
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.  
2
General Information  
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15  
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is  
subject to the following conditions:  
To manually lock the steering wheel:  
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel 1/ 2  
turn, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the  
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock  
engages.  
This device may not cause harmful interference.  
This device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
To release the steering wheel lock:  
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.  
If the key is difficult to turn, rotate the wheel slightly to  
the right or left to disengage the lock.  
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage  
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to  
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage  
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System  
This system prevents the key from being removed unless  
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button  
is fully released. It also prevents shifting out of PARK  
unless the key is in the ON/ RUN or START positions and  
you have depressed the brake pedal.  
DOOR LOCKS  
Manual Door Locks  
All doors are equipped with a rocker-type interior door  
lock. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, press the  
rocker switch to the LOCK position and close the door.  
NOTE: To avoid accidentally locking your keys in the  
vehicle, make sure you have them with you before  
closing any door.  
CAUTION!  
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always  
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the  
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.  
WARNING!  
For personal security, and safety in the event of an  
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well  
as when you park and leave the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15  
Power Door Locks — If Equipped  
A power door lock switch is on each front door panel.  
Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.  
WARNING!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-  
ries and death.  
2
Central Locking/Unlocking — If Equipped  
All vehicle doors are locked with the first turn of the key  
to the LOCK position. The double activation feature  
requires you to turn the key in the cylinder lock two  
times within five seconds to UNLOCK all vehicle doors  
at once.  
You may disable this feature and unlock all the doors  
with one turn of the key by performing the following  
procedure:  
NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 must be completed within 10  
seconds.  
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition  
switch.  
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/ OFF four times ending  
in the OFF position.  
3. Press the interior door lock switch to the UNLOCK  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have  
successfully disabled the double activation feature. You  
can turn the feature back on by repeating the above  
mentioned procedure.  
3. Press the interior door lock switch to the LOCK  
position.  
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have  
successfully completed the programming.  
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above  
mentioned procedure.  
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above  
mentioned procedure.  
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped  
The doors will lock automatically if:  
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)  
1. all doors are closed,  
2. vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/ h),  
3. the accelerator pedal is depressed.  
The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by  
performing the following procedure:  
NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 must be completed within 10  
seconds.  
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition  
switch.  
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the  
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-  
protection door lock system.  
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/ OFF four times ending  
in the OFF position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17  
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the  
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage  
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is  
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the  
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the  
unlocked position.  
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED  
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and  
trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances up to  
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held transmitter.  
2
WARNING!  
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.  
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened  
from the outside when the child protection locks are  
engaged.  
NOTE: A slight delay of up to two seconds can occur  
before the doors or trunk will unlock.  
To Unlock the Doors  
Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the  
drivers door. Press the button twice within 5 seconds to  
unlock all doors. The interior lights also come on and  
remain on for about 30 seconds when you unlock the  
doors.  
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,  
move the door lock rocker switch to the UNLOCK  
position, roll down the window and open the door with  
the outside door handle.  
NOTE: You may turn off this feature and unlock all  
doors with one press of the button by following the  
procedure shown in the Central Locking/ Unlocking  
paragraph.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To Lock the Doors  
To Unlock the Trunk  
Press and release the LOCK button to lock all doors. The  
park/ lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to ac-  
knowledge the signal.  
Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter twice to  
unlock the trunk.  
NOTE: A slight delay of up to two seconds can occur  
Horn Chirp Feature  
before the trunk unlatches.  
The horn chirp that signals that the doors have been  
locked can be toggled on or off by using the following  
procedure:  
Using The Panic Alarm  
To turn on the panic alarm feature, press and release the  
PANIC button. When the panic alarm is on the headlights  
and park/ lamps will flash, the horn will pulse on and off  
and the interior lights will turn on.  
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to the  
ON/ RUN position.  
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the transmitter  
for 4 to 10 seconds.  
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you  
press the PANIC button a second time, or until vehicle  
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/ h).  
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button and press the  
LOCK button.  
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing  
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be  
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of  
the system.  
4. Release both buttons.  
A chime will sound to signify that the feature has been  
successfully completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19  
Programming Additional Transmitters  
General Information  
Up to four transmitters can be programmed to your  
vehicle. Your new vehicle was shipped with two trans-  
mitters. See your dealer for additional transmitters.  
This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device  
must accept any interference that may be received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.  
2
Additional transmitters can be programmed to the sys-  
tem by using the following procedure:  
If your transmitter fails to operate from a normal dis-  
tance, check for these two conditions.  
1. Insert the key into the ignition and turn the switch to  
the RUN position.  
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of  
batteries is from one to two years.  
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the transmitter  
for between four and ten seconds.  
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station  
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.  
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button and press the  
PANIC button. A chime will sound to indicate that the  
transmitter programming mode has been entered.  
Transmitter Battery Service  
The recommended replacement battery is 2016 or its  
equivalent.  
4. Press a button on all transmitters to be programmed to  
the system, including any previously programmed trans-  
mitters. A chime will sound when each transmitter has  
been programmed.  
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on  
the back housing or the printed circuit board.  
5. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the transmitter  
programming mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a thin  
coin or similar object to pry the two halves of the  
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the rubber  
gasket during removal.  
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM — IF EQUIPPED  
The system monitors the doors, trunk key cylinder, and  
ignition for unauthorized operation.  
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for  
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will  
sound and the headlights, park/ turn signal lights, tail  
lights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash.  
Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.  
If the monitored system which triggered the alarm is  
deactivated, the alarm will continue to sound until 3  
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored system  
which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the alarm  
has been on for 3 minutes, the alarm will shut off  
immediately.  
To set the alarm:  
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the  
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause  
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with  
rubbing alcohol.  
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out  
of the vehicle.  
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door  
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all  
doors.  
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap two halves  
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two  
halves. Test transmitter operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21  
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash  
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is  
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the  
ignition switch is turned on, or the power door locks are  
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically  
disarm. If the light comes on but does not flash, the  
system is arming but there is a problem in the trunk  
circuit. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash  
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.  
Tamper Alert  
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door  
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the  
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-  
ing.  
2
Security System Manual Override  
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the  
manual lock control.  
REMOTE TRUNK LID RELEASE — IF EQUIPPED  
You can open the trunk from inside the vehicle by  
pressing a switch located inside the glove compartment.  
Vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer  
System can be safely started with a valid key. A valid key  
is one that is programmed to that particular vehicle. A  
valid key will disarm the system, an invalid key will  
trigger the alarm.  
NOTE: The remote trunk release feature will operate  
with the ignition switch in all positions. The remote trunk  
release will not operate above 5 mph.  
To disarm the system:  
Unlock a front door using either the key or the Keyless  
Entry Transmitter.  
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm  
the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
INTERNAL EMERGENCY TRUNK LID RELEASE  
WARNING!  
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,  
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or  
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the  
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in  
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,  
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped  
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or  
heat stroke.  
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency  
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.  
In the event of an individual being locked inside the  
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the  
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the trunk latching  
mechanism. See picture below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23  
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED  
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS  
The window switches on the drivers door panel control  
both front windows. The switch on the passengers door  
panel controls the passengers window.  
Some of the most important safety features in your  
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front  
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front  
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side  
airbags for both the driver and front passenger. If you  
will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts,  
your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child  
restraint systems.  
2
Please pay close attention to the information in this  
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system  
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as  
possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Lap/Shoulder Belts  
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/  
Shoulder Belts.  
WARNING!  
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer  
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-  
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or  
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the  
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your  
vehicle are buckled up properly.  
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during  
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the  
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under  
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock  
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle  
or being thrown out.  
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even  
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver  
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen  
far away from home or on your own street.  
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that  
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.  
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are  
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility  
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the  
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should  
be belted at all times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions  
WARNING!  
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and  
adjust the seat.  
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat  
belts are designed to go around the large bones of  
your body. These are the strongest parts of your  
body and can take the forces of a collision the  
best.  
2
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make  
your injuries in a collision much worse. You  
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even  
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-  
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep  
your passengers safe, too.  
Two people should never be belted into a single  
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one  
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.  
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more  
than one person, no matter what their size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front  
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch  
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the  
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around  
your lap.  
WARNING!  
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will  
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride  
too high on your body, possibly causing internal  
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle  
nearest you.  
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.  
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,  
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat  
belt snugly.  
A belt that is worn under your arm is very  
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-  
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head  
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause  
internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder  
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your  
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.  
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you  
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to  
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your  
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to  
be used together.  
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch  
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27  
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your  
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up  
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,  
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt  
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.  
WARNING!  
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces wont  
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your  
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-  
sible and keep it snug.  
2
A twisted belt cant do its job as well. In a collision  
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.  
If you cant straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it  
to your dealer and have it fixed.  
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor  
will withdraw any slack in the belt.  
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.  
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.  
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to  
allow the belt to retract fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision  
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt  
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose  
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.  
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat  
belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.  
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a  
collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor,  
torn webbing, etc.).  
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will  
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,  
youll prefer a higher position. When you release the  
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that  
it is locked in position.  
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage  
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt  
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt  
away from your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage  
button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or  
down to the position that serves you best.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure  
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/  
shoulder belt.  
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the  
anchor point.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. At about 6 to 12 inches above the latch plate, grasp and  
twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins  
immediately above the latch plate.  
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the  
folded webbing.  
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women  
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.  
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the  
latch plate.  
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts  
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is  
the best way to keep the baby safe.  
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt  
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31  
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take  
the force if there is a collision.  
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental  
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags  
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and  
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint  
systems. The drivers front airbag is mounted in the  
center of the steering wheel. The passengers front airbag  
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove  
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on  
the airbag covers.  
2
Seat Belt Extender  
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and  
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if  
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can  
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender  
should be used only if the existing belt is not long  
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender  
and store it.  
WARNING!  
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can  
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use  
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is  
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating  
positions. Remove and store the extender when not  
needed.  
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal  
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are  
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and  
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.  
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag  
covers or attempt to manually open them. You  
may damage the airbags and you could be injured  
because the airbags are not there to protect you.  
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are  
designed to open only when the airbags are in-  
flating.  
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do  
not use accessory seat covers or place objects  
between you and the side airbags; the perfor-  
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects  
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.  
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do  
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or  
around the door. The inflating side airbag could  
drive the objects into occupants, causing serious  
injury.  
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the  
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-  
ment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33  
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along  
with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instru-  
ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection  
for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work  
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.  
NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passen-  
ger front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause  
severe injury or death to infants in that position.  
2
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the  
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should  
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-  
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use  
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should  
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow  
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under  
their arm.  
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types  
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to  
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the  
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in  
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of  
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-  
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you  
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for  
the airbags to protect you properly.  
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front  
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the  
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child  
restraint. See the section on Child Restraint.  
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the  
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.  
You should read the instructions provided with your  
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.  
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride  
buckled up in a rear seat.  
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder  
Infants in rear facing child restraints (designed for chil-  
dren up to 20 lbs (9 kg) and less than one year old) should  
belts properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be  
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags  
room to inflate.  
WARNING!  
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more  
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work  
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In  
some collisions the airbags wont deploy at all.  
Always wear your seat belts even though you  
have airbags.  
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against  
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space  
between you and the door.  
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause  
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit  
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach  
the steering wheel or instrument panel.  
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need  
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit  
upright in the center of the seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35  
Airbag System Components  
The front airbag system consists of the following:  
Right and Left Side Impact Airbag Control Modules  
(SIACM)  
Airbag Control Module (ACM)  
AIRBAG Readiness Light  
Driver Airbag  
Interconnecting Wiring  
2
How The Airbag System Works  
Front Airbag System  
The front Airbag Control Module determines if a  
frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags  
to inflate.  
Passenger Airbag  
Steering Wheel and Column  
Instrument Panel  
The Airbag Control Module is not designed to detect  
side, roll over, or rear collisions.  
Crash Sensor  
The Airbag Control Module also monitors the readi-  
ness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the  
ignition switch is in the START or ON/ RUN positions.  
These include all of the items listed above except the  
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering  
wheel and column. If the key is in the OFF position, in  
the ACC position, or not in the ignition switch, the  
airbags are not on and will not inflate.  
Interconnecting Wiring  
Knee Impact Bolsters  
The side airbag system, if equipped, consists of the  
following:  
AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag  
system)  
Side Airbag in the Drivers Seat  
Side Airbag in the Passengers Seat  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The Airbag Control Module also turns on the AIRBAG  
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when  
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, then  
turns the light off. If it detects a malfunction in any  
part of the system, it turns on the light either momen-  
tarily or continuously.  
WARNING!  
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel  
could mean you wont have the airbags to protect  
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays  
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you  
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.  
When the Airbag Control Module detects a collision  
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A  
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate  
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of  
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The  
airbags fully inflate in about 50 milliseconds. This is  
only about half of the time it takes you to blink your  
eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to  
restrain the driver and front passenger. The drivers  
front airbag gas is vented through the airbag material  
towards the instrument panel. The passengers front  
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of  
the airbag. In this way the airbags do not interfere with  
your control of the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37  
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and  
position you for the best interaction with the front  
airbag.  
However, if you have not healed significantly within a  
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor  
immediately.  
2
If A Deployment Occurs  
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like  
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the  
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag  
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,  
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,  
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat  
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,  
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your  
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-  
tions for cleaning.  
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Airbag  
Control Module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal  
collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger,  
and then to immediately deflate.  
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to  
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This  
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag  
system.  
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any  
or all of the following may occur:  
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the  
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another  
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.  
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-  
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and front  
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The  
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those  
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium  
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.  
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag  
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered by  
the appropriate SIACM, releasing a quantity of non-  
toxic gas. The inflating side airbag exits through the  
seat seam into the space between the occupant and the  
door. The side airbag moves at a very high speed and  
with such a high force, that it could injure you if you  
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in  
the area where the side airbag inflates. This especially  
applies to children.  
WARNING!  
Deployed airbags cant protect you in another colli-  
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
Side Airbag System — If Equipped  
The Side Impact Airbag Control Modules determine if  
a side collision is severe enough to require the airbag  
to inflate. The Side Impact Airbag Control Modules is  
not designed to detect roll over, front, or rear impacts.  
Enhanced Accident Response Time — If Equipped  
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical  
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with  
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,  
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped  
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition  
switch is turned off.  
The Side Impact Airbag Control Module monitors the  
readiness of the electronic parts of the system when-  
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/ RUN  
positions. These include all of the items listed above. If  
the left or right SIACM detects a malfunction in any  
part of the system, it will send a message to the frontal  
ACM to turn the Airbag Light on. The Airbag Control  
Module also turns on the AIRBAG light in the instru-  
ment panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch  
is first turned on as a diagnostic or system check, then  
turns the light off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39  
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems  
WARNING!  
Airbag Light  
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your  
protection in an impact. While the airbag system is  
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following  
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system  
immediately:  
2
Modifications to any part of the airbag system  
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could  
be injured because the airbags are not there to  
protect you. Do not modify the components or  
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or  
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or  
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do  
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-  
ture, or frame.  
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during  
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first  
turned on.  
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second  
interval.  
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while  
driving.  
You need proper knee impact protection in a  
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket  
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.  
Child Restraint  
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all  
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the  
United States and all Canadian provinces require that  
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the  
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.  
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the  
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who  
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-  
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash  
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seats, rather than in the front.  
Safety experts recommend that children ride  
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least  
one year old and weigh at leas 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types  
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant  
carriers and “convertible” child seats. Both types of  
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/  
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage  
system.  
WARNING!  
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny  
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The  
force required to hold even an infant on your lap  
could become so great that you could not hold the  
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and  
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in  
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the  
childs size.  
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the  
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up  
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be  
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher  
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than  
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing  
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are  
less than one year old.  
Infants And Small Children  
There are different sizes and types of restraints for  
children from newborn size to the child almost large  
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child  
seat Owners Manual to ensure you have the right seat  
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your  
child:  
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in  
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger  
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe  
injury or death to infants in this position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41  
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who  
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible  
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for  
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who  
are older than one year. These child seats are also held  
in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the LATCH  
child restraint anchorage system.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation can lead to failure of an  
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a  
collision. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex-  
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.  
2
A rearward facing infant restraint should only be  
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant  
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a  
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-  
vere or fatal injury to the infant.  
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-  
ing more than 18 kg (40 lbs), but who are still too small  
to fit the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child  
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat  
cushion while the childs back is against the seat back;  
they should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The  
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the  
lap/ shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped  
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the  
lap portion.)  
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child  
restraint:  
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it  
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety  
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure  
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle  
where you will use it before you buy it.  
NOTE:  
www.seatcheck.org.  
For additional information  
refer to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs  
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for  
weight and height limits.  
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if pulling and  
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect  
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle  
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle  
again. If you still cant make the child restraint secure,  
try a different seating position.  
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the  
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may  
not work when you need it.  
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child  
restraint manufacturers directions.  
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch  
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight  
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use  
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the  
lap/ shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch  
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt  
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-  
ally and pull it tight if necessary.  
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the  
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.  
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or  
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs  
and cause serious personal injury.  
LATCH —L ower Anchors and Tether for CHildren  
Your vehicles rear seat is equipped with the child  
restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands  
for Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. The LATCH  
system provides for the installation of the child restraint  
without using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating  
positions have exclusive lower anchorages. These are  
round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where  
it meets the seat back, and just visible when you lean into  
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the  
lap/ shoulder belt on the child restraint because the  
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path  
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate  
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt  
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into  
the buckle with the release button facing out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43  
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily  
feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of  
the surfaces. The lower strap hooks are passed over the  
top of each bar, pushing aside the seat cover material.  
To attach a child restraint tether strap:  
1. Lift the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat  
where you are placing the child restraint.  
2
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path  
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If  
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head  
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,  
route the tether strap under the head restraint and  
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head  
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard  
side of the head restraint.  
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages  
behind each rear seating position located in the  
panel between the rear seat back and the rear  
window — under a hinged plastic cover with  
this symbol on it. (Shown to the left) In recent years, only  
the tether anchorage has been provided in new vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to  
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap  
according to the child restraint manufacturers instruc-  
tions.  
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to  
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child  
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-  
ages will continue to have features for installation in  
vehicles using the lap or lap/ shoulder belt. They will also  
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage  
of all of the available attachments provided with your  
child restraint in any vehicle.  
WARNING!  
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  
increased head motion and possible injury to the  
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind  
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether  
strap.  
Installing the Child Restraint System  
While there are LATCH anchorages at all three rear  
seating positions, do not install child restraints at all three  
positions at the same time. The anchorages are not  
designed to restrain three child restraints at one time.  
Instead, you may install one child restraint at the center  
position, or two child restraints at the right and left  
positions.  
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to  
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child  
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection  
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some  
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will  
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older  
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for  
most older vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45  
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we  
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-  
tions that come with the child restraint system.  
WARNING!  
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with  
LATCH attachments at all three rear seating posi-  
tions at one time. The LATCH anchorages are de-  
signed to restrain no more than two child restraints  
at a time in the event of a collision.  
2
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH  
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat  
belts.  
WARNING!  
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the  
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,  
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with  
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or  
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the  
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some  
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped  
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the  
tension in the strap.  
Improper installation of a child restraint to the  
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or  
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly  
when installing an infant or child restraint.  
Children Too Large For Booster Seats  
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend  
over the front of the seat when their back is against the  
seat back, should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.  
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower  
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach  
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether  
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the  
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.  
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug  
as possible.  
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS  
The engine in your new vehicle does not require a long  
break-in period.  
Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or  
slouching can move the belt out of position.  
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).  
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55  
mph (80 or 90 km/ h) are desirable.  
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the  
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a  
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind  
their back.  
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the  
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.  
Transporting Pets  
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be  
detrimental and should be avoided.  
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.  
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly  
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in  
a collision.  
The crankcase oil installed in the engine at the factory is  
a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil  
changes should be consistent with expected climate con-  
ditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The  
recommended viscosity and quality grades are in Section  
7 of this manual.  
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses  
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.  
Do not use non-detergent or straight mineral oils.  
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few  
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the  
break-in and not an indication of a problem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47  
SAFETY TIPS  
Exhaust Gas  
remain open, close all windows. Adjust the heating or  
cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle. Set  
the blower at high speed.  
2
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The  
Vehicle  
WARNING!  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.  
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)  
follow the safety tips below.  
Seat Belts  
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,  
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced  
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a  
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after  
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn  
webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or  
retractor condition, replace the belt.  
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined  
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or  
out of the area.  
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine  
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force  
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.  
Airbag Light  
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to  
8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition  
switch is first turned to ON/ RUN. If the bulb is  
not lit during starting, have it replaced. If the light stays  
on or comes on while driving, have the system checked  
by an authorized dealer.  
To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close the  
trunk while driving. However, if for some reason it must  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Defrosters  
Lights  
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place  
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to  
feel the air directed against the windshield.  
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights  
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high  
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.  
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside  
The Vehicle  
Fluid Leaks  
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,  
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are  
present, the cause should be corrected immediately.  
Tires  
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear  
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects  
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall  
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-  
ing spare) for proper pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
3
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Inside Day/ Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Front Map/ Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .60  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Inside Compass/ Temperature Mirror—If  
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Outside Mirror — Drivers Side . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Outside Mirror — Passengers Side . . . . . . . . . .54  
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If  
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Reclining Bucket Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .62  
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Mist Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Lo Speed Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Hi Speed Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . .65  
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Ash Receiver And Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 51  
MIRRORS  
Inside Compass/Temperature Mirror—If Equipped  
Adjust the mirror to center the view through the rear  
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal  
and vertical mirror adjustments.  
Inside Day/Night Mirror  
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear  
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal  
and vertical mirror adjustment.  
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by rotating the  
small knob under the mirror in the clockwise direction,  
so the knob points to the right (night position). The  
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position  
(knob points towards rear of vehicle.)  
3
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the  
small control under the mirror to the night position  
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted  
while set in the day position (toward windshield).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Lights  
Briefly press the “Right” button to toggle the right  
reading lamp “ON/ OFF”. Repeat the key press to  
cycle the light  
Briefly press the “Left” button to toggle the left  
reading lamp “ON/ OFF”. Repeat the key press to  
cycle the light.  
NOTE: The light can be activated with the ignition off.  
NOTE: The light(s) will automatically shut off after  
seven minutes with ignition off.  
Display ON/OFF  
Temperature  
Press and hold the “Right” button for 10–15 seconds  
(until display toggles ON/ OFF) then release the button.  
Repeat the key press to cycle the display ON/ OFF.  
Press and hold the “Right” button for 5–10 seconds (until  
°F/ °C toggles in the display) then release the button.  
Repeat the key press to cycle the °F/ °C in the display.  
NOTE: The display will default “ON” at each new  
ignition cycle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 53  
Compass Variance  
Find your current location and determine the correct  
Zone number from the map.  
Press and hold the “Left” button for 5–10 seconds  
(until “Zone” appears in the display), then release the  
button. The number displayed is the current Zone  
value.  
3
If a new Zone value is desired, briefly press the “Left”  
button to increment the displayed value, (Range 1–15)  
until you find your desired Zone number.  
No button activity for 4–5 seconds ends the Zone entry  
mode. The display will return to normal operation and  
the new Zone number will be set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Compass Calibration  
WARNING!  
If “CAL” is not displayed, press and hold the “Left”  
button for 10–15 seconds, or until “CAL” appears in the  
display, then release the button. The compass is now in  
calibration mode.  
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side  
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away  
than they really are. Relying too much on your  
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide  
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside  
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle  
seen in this convex mirror.  
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways  
Drive the vehicle in circles at less then 5mph (8 km/ h)  
until “CAL” no longer appears in the display.  
Drive the vehicle under normal operating conditions.  
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped  
Use the mirror select switch, located on the drivers door  
trim panel, to adjust the view obtained in the outside  
mirrors. Press the rocker knob to the L or R for Left or  
Right mirror selection. Use the center off position to  
guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.  
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side  
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of  
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the  
inside mirror.  
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side  
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the  
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 55  
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the  
direction you want the mirror to move.  
SEATS  
Front Seat Adjustment  
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the  
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired  
position.  
3
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the  
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched after the  
adjustment bar is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Reclining Bucket Seats  
WARNING!  
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,  
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean  
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean  
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its  
normal position.  
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat  
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt  
might not be properly adjusted and you could be  
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is  
parked.  
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat  
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use  
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57  
Adjustable Head Restraints  
Folding Rear Seat  
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in  
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down  
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as  
practical. Push in on the release button to lower the head  
restraint.  
To provide additional storage area, the center of each rear  
seatback can be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown  
in the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD  
WARNING!  
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull  
the hood release lever located under the drivers side of  
the instrument panel.  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,  
people riding in these areas are more likely to be  
seriously injured or killed.  
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat-  
belts  
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  
and using a seatbelt properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59  
Then lift the safety catch located under the front edge of  
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.  
3
WARNING!  
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when  
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.  
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches  
are fully latched before driving.  
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open  
position as shown. To prevent possible damage, do not  
slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at  
the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
LIGHTS  
Interior Lights  
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.  
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped  
These lights, located under the rearview mirror, can be  
turned on by means of switches located at the base of the  
rearview mirror.  
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 8  
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left  
in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON  
to restore the interior light operation.  
Dimmer Control  
With the park lights or headlights  
on, rotating the dimmer control  
for the interior lights on the Multi-  
Function Control Lever upward  
will increase the brightness of the  
instrument panel lights.  
NOTE: The map lights will remain on when the ignition  
switch is in the Run or Accessory positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61  
Dome Light Position  
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is  
located on the left side of the steering column.  
Rotate the dimmer control com-  
pletely upward to the second de-  
tent to turn on the interior lights.  
The interior lights will remain on  
when the dimmer control is in this  
position.  
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel  
Lights  
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the  
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the  
second detent for headlight operation.  
3
Daytime Brightness Feature  
Certain instrument panel components can be illuminated  
at full brightness during the daytime. These are the  
Odometer and Radio. This can be helpful when driving  
with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a  
parade or a funeral procession. To activate this feature,  
rotate the dimmer ring on the left stalk one detent lower  
than the dome light.  
Multi-Function Control Lever  
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation  
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight  
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior  
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,  
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control  
Lever up or down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)  
Turn Signals  
The front fog lights will come on as Daytime Running  
Lights whenever the ignition is on, the headlights are off,  
and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must  
be used for normal night time driving.  
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down to  
detent and the arrows on each side of the instrument  
cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and  
rear turn signal lights. You can signal a lane change by  
moving the lever partially up or down.  
Lights-on Reminder  
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition  
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the drivers door  
is opened. Leaving the headlights on for an extended  
period of time will discharge the battery resulting in  
reduced battery life and possible inability to start the  
vehicle.  
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a  
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light  
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is  
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is  
defective.  
Headlight Dimmer Switch  
Fog Lights — If Equipped  
Pull the Multi-Function Control Lever towards you to  
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the control  
lever a second time to switch the headlights to LOW  
beam.  
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function  
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn  
on the headlights and pull out the end of the  
control lever.  
Passing Light  
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-  
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights or  
park lights will turn off the fog lights.  
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward  
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high  
beam and remain on until the lever is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63  
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS  
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch  
on the control lever. The lever is located on the  
right side of the steering column. Move the con-  
trol lever up to select the desired wiper speed.  
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers  
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.  
CAUTION!  
3
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch  
and allow the wipers to return to the park position  
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch  
is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,  
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the  
vehicle is restarted.  
Mist Function  
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single  
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from  
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the  
wipers will continue to operate.  
Windshield Washers  
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and  
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in  
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for  
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then  
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.  
Intermittent Wiper System  
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions  
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-  
tween cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the first detent  
(DEL) position, then select the delay interval by turning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward (clockwise)  
to decrease the delay time and downward (counterclock-  
wise) to increase the delay time. The delay can be  
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds  
between cycles, to a cycle every second.  
TILT STEERING COLUMN  
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn  
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as  
desired. Pull the lever back towards you to lock the  
column firmly in place.  
Lo Speed Wipers  
Move the wiper stalk upward to the 2nd detent to obtain  
a low speed wiper function.  
Hi Speed Wipers  
Move the wiper stalk upward to the 3rd position to  
obtain the fastest wiper speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65  
WARNING!  
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-  
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have  
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-  
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.  
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED  
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator  
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/ h). The  
speed control lever is located on the right side of the  
steering wheel.  
To Activate:  
Push the ON/ OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the  
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system  
OFF, push the ON/ OFF button a second time. The  
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be  
turned OFF when not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To Resume Speed:  
WARNING!  
To resume a previously set speed, push the “ACC/ RES”  
lever up and release. Resume can be used at any speed  
above 32 km/ h (20 mph).  
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on  
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally  
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.  
You could lose control and have an accident. Always  
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.  
To Vary The Speed Setting:  
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by  
pushing up and holding “ACC/ RES”. Release the lever  
when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed  
will be set.  
To Set At A Desired Speed:  
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press  
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator  
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.  
Tapping “ACC/ RES” once will result in a 2 mph (3  
km/ h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,  
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will  
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/ h), etc.  
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady  
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.  
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down  
and hold “COAST/ SET”. Release the lever when the  
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.  
To Deactivate:  
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control  
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch  
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed  
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing  
the ON/ OFF button or turning off the ignition switch  
erases the set speed memory.  
Tapping the “COAST/ SET” button once will result in a 1  
mph (2 km/ h) speed decrease. Each time the button is  
tapped, speed decreases.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67  
Manual Transaxle:  
To Accelerate For Passing:  
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed  
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed  
control disengages is normal.  
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the  
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.  
Using Speed Control On Hills  
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to  
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed  
loss.  
3
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up  
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills  
is normal.  
Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles  
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing  
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd  
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.  
WARNING!  
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system  
cant maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could  
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose  
control. An accident could be the result. Dont use  
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are  
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.  
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so  
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED  
The sunroof control is located on the headliner between  
the sun visors.  
one second) to initiate the express open mode. During  
this operation, any movement of the switch will stop the  
sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position.  
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward  
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the  
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open  
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.  
WARNING!  
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown  
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also  
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your  
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are  
properly secured too.  
A single control “tilts” the sunroof to the vent position  
and also slides the sunroof rearward to the full open  
position. Move the switch rearward to move the sunroof  
panel to the full vent position. The sunroof can be  
stopped at any position between closed and full vent  
open.  
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.  
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any  
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury  
may result.  
Once the sunroof panel is in the full vent position, you  
may momentarily move the switch rearward (less than  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69  
Sunroof Maintenance  
CONSOLE FEATURES  
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean  
the glass panel.  
The Standard console with armrest has two front cup  
holders and a front storage tray. There are two additional  
cupholders; one is molded in the center of the console to  
hold large cups, and the other is on the underside of the  
console lid to serve passengers in the rear seat. The  
underside console lid also has an integral tissue pack  
holder. The covered storage area has CD and cassette  
holders.  
Wind Buffeting  
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain  
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-  
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with  
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows  
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs  
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to  
minimize the buffeting.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter  
When the Smokers Package is ordered from your autho-  
rized dealer, an ash receiver tray and a cigar lighter  
element are furnished. The lighter element can be in-  
serted in the auxiliary power outlet. The ash receiver fits  
snugly in a cupholder position. To clean the ash receiver,  
lift it from the cupholder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CONTENTS  
Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
4
Standard Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Optional Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Optional Instrument Cluster — R/ T Model . . . .77  
Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Sales Code RBB—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With  
Cassette Tape Player And CD Changer  
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Electronic Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
To Set The Push-Button Memory . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Bass And Treble Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
AM/ FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification  
Number (ENS/ SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB And RBK  
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ,  
And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
CD Changer Control Capability — If  
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . .97  
Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Using The PTY (Program Type) Button  
Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With  
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . . . . . .89  
PTY Button ЉScanЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
PTY Button ЉSeekЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . .98  
6 Disc CD Changer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .99  
Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
CD Changer Control Capability — If  
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73  
Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
FF/ Tune/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Program Button 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Program Button 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Removing Discs From The CD Changer . . . . . 101  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 102  
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Heater Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Side Window Demisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Air Conditioning — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
4
CD Changer Operation With The Changer  
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75  
STANDARD INSTRUMENT CLUSTER  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
OPTIONAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77  
OPTIONAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — R/T  
MODEL  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS  
WARNING!  
1. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped  
This light shows when the front fog lights are  
ON.  
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-  
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance  
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will  
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your  
vehicle harder to control. You could have an acci-  
dent. Have the vehicle checked immediately.  
2. Brake System Warning Light  
This light monitors various brake functions,  
including brake fluid level and parking  
brake application. If the brake light comes  
on, it may indicate that the parking brake is  
applied, or there is a low brake fluid level. On vehicles  
equipped with Anti-lock brakes (ABS), it may also  
indicate an ABS malfunction that could lead to re-  
duced braking performance.  
The operation of the Brake Warning light can be checked  
by turning the ignition key from the OFF to the ON  
position. The light should illuminate for three seconds, or  
until the engine is started, whichever comes first. The  
light should then go out unless the parking brake is  
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not  
illuminate, have the light inspected and serviced as soon  
as possible.  
The light will also come on when the parking brake is  
applied with the ignition in the ON position.  
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is  
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79  
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have  
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.  
point midway between ON and START. The light should  
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system  
checked by an authorized dealer.  
3. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped  
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System  
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This  
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to  
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four  
seconds.  
4. Speedometer  
Indicates vehicle speed.  
5. Turn Signal Indicators  
4
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior  
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.  
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,  
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system  
is not functioning and that service is required, however,  
the conventional brake system will continue to operate  
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not  
on.  
6. High Beam Indicator  
This light shows that the headlights are on high  
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the  
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or  
low beam.  
7. Tachometer — If Equipped  
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced  
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock  
Brakes.  
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine  
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.  
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to  
prevent engine damage.  
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure  
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
8. Oil Pressure Light  
10. Charging System Light  
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will  
come on and remain on when the ignition key is  
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light  
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does  
not come on during starting, have the system checked  
by an authorized dealer.  
This light shows the status of the electrical  
charging system. The light should come on  
briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain  
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or  
comes on while driving, it means that there is a  
problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE  
IMMEDIATELY.  
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop  
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE  
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.  
11. Airbag Light  
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8  
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition  
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not  
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on while  
driving, have the system checked by an authorized  
dealer.  
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.  
This can be determined using the procedure shown in  
Section 7.  
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light  
When the ignition key is first turned on, this  
light will come on for about six seconds. A  
chime will sound if you have not pulled the  
shoulder belt out of the retractor. This is a reminder to  
“buckle up”. If you do not buckle up, the light will  
remain on.  
12. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped  
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the  
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash  
slowly indicating that the system is armed.  
13. Fuel Door Reminder  
This symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is  
located on the passengers side of the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81  
14. Fuel Gauge  
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the  
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,  
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after  
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light  
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In  
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will  
not require towing.  
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in  
the fuel tank.  
15. Low Fuel Light — If Equipped  
NOTE: The Low Fuel Light and Chime feature only  
functions on vehicles equipped with a tachometer.  
When the fuel level drops to about 1/ 8 tank, the  
fuel symbol will light and a single chime will  
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is  
added. If the fuel level drops to about 1/ 2 gallon, the  
fuel symbol will begin to flash and the chime will  
sound several times.  
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the  
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that  
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic  
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as  
soon as possible if this occurs.  
4
17. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob  
Press this knob to switch between the odometer and trip  
odometer. While the trip odometer is being displayed,  
press and hold this knob for a few seconds to reset the  
trip odometer to zero miles/ kilometers.  
16. Malfunction Indicator Light  
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic  
system called OBD that monitors emissions,  
engine, and automatic transmission control  
systems. The light will illuminate briefly when the key  
is in the ON/ RUN position before engine start. If the  
bulb does not come on when turning the key from  
OFF to ON/ RUN, have the condition checked  
promptly.  
18. Odometer/Trip Odometer  
Shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.  
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of  
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-  
fore, if the odometer reading changes during repair or  
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading  
before and after the service so the correct mileage can be  
determined.  
blue and red areas of the gauge shows that the engine  
cooling system is operating properly. The gauge  
pointer may show a higher than normal temperature  
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in  
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.  
19. Door Ajar Indicator  
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument  
This vacuum fluorescent display indicator illuminates  
when a door is not completely closed. If the door is open  
for more than 8 minutes and the ignition key is in the  
OFF position, the indicator will turn off.  
cluster will sound a chime. Pull off the road at a safe area.  
With the vehicle in Park, idle the vehicle with the air  
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into  
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)  
mark, turn the ignition off immediately and call for  
service.  
20. Trip Indicator  
This light will illuminate when the Trip Odometer is in  
use.  
There are steps that you can take to slow down an  
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is  
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to  
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C  
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature  
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and  
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act  
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  
from the engine cooling system.  
21. Cruise Light — If Equipped  
This indicator shows that the Speed Control  
System is ON.  
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the  
Speed Control System is on.  
22. Temperature Gauge  
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant  
temperature. Any reading between the light  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83  
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK  
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION  
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into  
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and  
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or  
ACC position.  
Radio Broadcast Signals  
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under  
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car  
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-  
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to  
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help  
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-  
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or  
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-  
nals.  
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when  
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is  
accurately maintained.  
4
Clock Setting Procedure  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position.  
Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press  
either the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio.  
The display will show TIME.  
Two Types of Signals  
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or  
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound  
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to  
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the  
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.  
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set  
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you  
press a button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Electrical Disturbances  
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD  
CHANGER CAPABILITY  
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during  
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,  
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They  
interfere very little with the frequency variations that  
carry the FM signal.  
AM Reception  
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception  
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines  
and neon signs.  
FM Reception  
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-  
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations  
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,  
which is the major feature of FM radio.  
Operating Instructions  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through  
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position  
to operate the radio.  
NOTE: When first learning the control functions, the  
user should set the controls as shown in the following  
list.  
Tone Controls…As illustrated.  
Speaker Control…Centered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85  
Power Button  
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass  
stations without stopping until you release it.  
The volume control/ power button pops out when  
pressed, this turns the sound system ON in the mode last  
used. Pushing the button back in turns the sound system  
OFF.  
Tune  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,  
the radio will continue to tune until the button is  
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pushed.  
Electronic Volume Control  
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360  
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the  
volume control to the right increases the volume and to  
the left decreases it.  
4
To Set The Push-Button Memory  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.  
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.  
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station  
and press and release that button. If a button is not  
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,  
the station will continue to play but will not be locked  
into push-button memory.  
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be  
set at the same volume level as last played.  
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,  
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition  
is ON.  
Seek  
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The  
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The  
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by  
pressing the push-button twice.  
AM/FM Selection  
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The  
operating mode will be displayed next to the station  
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received in the FM mode.  
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding  
button number will be displayed.  
Mode Button  
Balance  
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette  
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if  
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is  
selected “SA” will appear in your radio display.  
The balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-  
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust  
the balance and push the button back in.  
Fade  
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the  
Satellite or radio mode.  
The fade control provides for balance between the front  
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will  
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.  
Cassette Player Features  
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can  
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.  
Bass and Treble Tone Control  
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass  
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.  
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at  
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-  
creases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid  
position provides a balanced output.  
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or  
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),  
but only when the ignition and radio are on.  
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin  
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the  
player.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87  
Music Search  
Time Button  
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start  
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the  
next selection on the tape and down to return to the  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within  
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.  
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency  
and time of day.  
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will  
change the side of the tape being played.  
NR (Noise Reduction)  
4
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is  
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.  
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the  
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn  
ON.  
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music  
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-  
cally when a selection has been located.  
Selective Music Search  
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track  
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.  
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to  
move 2 selections, etc.  
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license  
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby  
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-  
ratories Licensing Corporation.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped  
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD  
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-  
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate  
this CD changer.  
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily  
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-  
tional arrows appear on the display.  
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Mode Button  
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until  
CD information appears on the display.  
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second  
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.  
CD Diagnostic Indicators  
Push-Button  
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may  
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or  
the player, and play will resume automatically.  
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1  
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a  
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently  
being played.  
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the  
following warning symbols may appear on your display.  
Seek Button  
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.  
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the  
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.  
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed  
when the operating temperature is corrected or another  
MODE is selected.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and  
hold the RW button for fast reverse.  
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is  
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:  
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and  
fast reverse are activated.  
Excessive vibration  
Random Play (RND)  
Disc inserted upside down  
Damaged disc  
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the  
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of  
pace.  
Water condensation on optics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89  
Radio Display Messages  
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages  
when a problem is detected with the CD player.  
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER  
CONTROLS  
4
Radio Operation  
Power/Volume Control  
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the  
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through  
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position  
to operate the radio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Seek  
Bass and Treble Tone Control  
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The  
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you  
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-  
pass stations without stopping until you release it.  
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass  
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.  
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at  
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-  
creases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid  
position provides a balanced output.  
Tune  
AM/FM Selection  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,  
the radio will continue to tune until you release the  
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pressed.  
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The  
operating mode will be displayed next to the station  
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received.  
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory  
Balance  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.  
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”  
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and  
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5  
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will  
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button  
memory.  
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-  
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust  
the balance and push the button back in.  
Fade  
The Fade control provides for balance between the front  
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will  
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM  
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The  
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by  
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset  
button is used a corresponding button number will be  
displayed.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
CD Player Operation  
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC  
position and the volume control ON before the CD player  
will operate.  
4
Inserting The Compact Disc  
Time  
CAUTION!  
Press the TIME button to change the display between  
radio frequency and time.  
3
This CD player will accept 4 4 inch (12 cm) discs  
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the  
CD player mechanism.  
General Information  
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,  
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio  
OFF, the display will show the time of day.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion.  
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD  
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
display will show the track number and index time in  
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track  
one.  
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4  
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing  
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on  
the selected disc in random order to provide an interest-  
ing change of pace.  
Seek  
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on  
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the  
first second of the current selection.  
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly  
selected track.  
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop  
Random Play.  
EJT — Eject  
Mode  
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move  
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to  
the radio mode.  
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the  
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the  
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if  
equipped) is selected “SA” will appear in your radio  
display.  
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be  
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.  
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.  
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the  
Satellite mode.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to  
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)  
button works in a similar manner.  
Time  
Press the TIME button to change the display from  
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93  
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped  
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD  
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-  
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate  
this CD changer.  
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and  
fast reverse are activated.  
Random Play (RND)  
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the  
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of  
pace.  
Mode Button  
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until  
CD information appears on the display.  
4
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second  
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.  
Push-Button  
CD Diagnostic Indicators  
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1  
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a  
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently  
being played.  
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may  
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or  
the player, and play will resume automatically.  
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the  
following warning symbols may appear on your display.  
Seek Button  
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the  
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.  
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and  
hold the RW button for fast reverse.  
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed  
when the operating temperature is corrected or another  
MODE is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is  
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:  
Excessive vibration  
Disc inserted upside down  
Damaged disc  
Water condensation on optics  
Radio Display Messages  
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages  
when a problem is detected with the CD player.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95  
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED  
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification  
Number (ENS/SID)  
The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification Num-  
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio  
system. To access the ESN/ SID, refer to the following  
steps:  
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-  
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to  
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-  
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,  
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-  
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.  
ESN/SID Access With RBB and RBK Radios  
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and  
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend-  
ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously  
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit  
ESN/ SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP  
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press  
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/ SID digits have  
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until  
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the  
ESN/ SID mode when any other button is pushed, the  
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any  
button was pushed.  
4
System Activation  
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the  
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site  
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-  
tion available when activating your system:  
1. The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification  
Number (ESN/ SID).  
2. Credit card information.  
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, and RBQ  
Radios  
The current program type and channel number will  
then be displayed for 5 seconds.  
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and  
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons  
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/ SID num-  
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/ SID  
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is  
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button  
was pushed.  
The current channel number will then be displayed  
until an action occurs.  
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the  
Satellite radio mode.  
Selecting a Channel  
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for  
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up  
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the  
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until  
the button is released.  
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB and RBK Radios  
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ЉS AЉ appears in  
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while  
in the Satellite radio mode.  
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, and  
RBQ Radios  
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word  
ЉSIRIUSЉ appears in the display. These radios will also  
display the following:  
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to  
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The  
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before  
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will  
appear in the display between each channel change. Press  
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.  
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel  
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.  
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable con-  
tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97  
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or  
unblocking. Please have your ESN/ SID information  
available.  
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory  
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory  
channel and stop the search.  
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels  
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆  
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you  
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button  
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not  
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the  
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.  
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ  
button within five seconds. The channel will change to  
the next channel that matches the program type selected.  
4
Satellite Antenna  
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the  
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects  
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause  
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be  
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items  
directly on or above the antenna.  
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if  
equipped)  
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your  
radio.  
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆  
When the desired program type is obtained, press the  
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7  
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next  
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ  
button a second time to stop the search.  
Reception Quality  
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the  
following reasons.  
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking  
structure or under a physical obstacle.  
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while  
performing a music type scan will change the channel by  
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the  
form of short audio mutes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can  
cause intermittent reception.  
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan  
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape  
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of  
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap  
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The  
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from  
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were  
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should  
periodically clean the head with a commercially available  
WET cleaning cassette.  
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can  
cause signal blockage.  
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE  
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,  
take the following precautions:  
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,  
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-  
ished.  
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every  
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very  
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to  
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.  
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from  
slackness and dust when it is not in use.  
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat  
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.  
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is  
adhering flatly to the cassette.  
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind  
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape  
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99  
6 DISC CD CHANGER — IF EQUIPPED  
The CD changer is located below the radio in the  
instrument panel. The changer plays only 4 4 inch (12  
cm) discs. The changer holds up to 6 discs. Each disc is  
loaded and ejected through a single slot in front of the  
changer. Each disc has a numbered button with an amber  
light above it which, when illuminated, indicates that a  
disc is loaded in that particular chamber.  
To insert additional CDs into the changer, the instructions  
follow:  
3
1. Select and press any numbered button without an  
illuminated light above it.  
2. Insert the CD while the light above the chosen button  
is flashing and the two lights on either side of the slot are  
illuminated.  
4
3. Upon insertion, the CD will begin to play, and both the  
button light and the lights in the corner of the loading  
slot will illuminate.  
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CDs.  
The CD player will stop while additional CDs are loaded.  
Playing Discs  
The radio will show the CD number, the CD track  
number, and the Track Time Elapsed while the radio is in  
the CD mode. If more than one CD is loaded in the  
changer, the changer will automatically play the next disc  
after playing the last track of the current disc.  
Loading the CD Changer  
When inserting the first CD into the changer if the radio  
is on, wait until the single slot is illuminated on both  
sides and simply insert the first disc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Seek Button  
NOTE: The changer will not random play between  
Press the top of this button on the radio once to play the  
next track. Press the bottom of the button once to return  
to the beginning of the current track. Press the bottom of  
the button twice to play the previous track.  
discs.  
Press the top of the Seek button once to move to the next  
randomly selected track. Press the bottom of the Seek  
button to go back to the beginning of the track.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press button 4 a second time to stop random play.  
Press the FF (fast forward) button and the CD player will  
fast forward through the tracks until the button is re-  
leased. Press the RW (rewind) button and the CD player  
will reverse through the tracks until the button is re-  
leased.  
Program Button 5  
Press this button to play the previous disc.  
Time Button  
Press this button to switch between time of day and CD  
track time.  
Mode Button  
Press this button to toggle between radio and cd modes.  
Changing Modes  
Program Button 1  
Press this button to play the next available disc.  
While in the radio mode, if a cassette is loaded, press the  
Mode button to switch to the tape mode. If a CD is  
loaded, press the Mode button to select the CD mode. If  
neither a tape nor CD is loaded, the radio will ignore the  
command.  
Program Button 4 (Random Play)  
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate  
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the  
current compact disc in random order to provide an  
interesting change of pace. The CD changer stays in the  
random play mode when changing to the next disc.  
Inserting either a tape or CD automatically starts that  
mode of play.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101  
Pressing the AM/ FM button while in the tape or CD  
mode will select the radio mode.  
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE  
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the  
following precautions:  
If in the CD mode and the last CD is ejected, the radio  
will tune to the last station selected.  
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the  
surface.  
Removing Discs from the CD Changer  
If there is a single CD in the changer, press the EJT button  
and the CD will eject. If the CD is not removed within 15  
seconds, it will automatically reload into the CD changer.  
To eject additional CDs from the changer, first select the  
numbered button where the CD is located and then press  
the EJT button.  
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,  
wiping from center to edge.  
4
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-  
ing the disc.  
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,  
or antistatic sprays.  
CD Changer Operation with the Changer Off  
The CD changer is able to load and eject discs with the  
ignition power off. However, while the ignition is off, one  
of the six numbered buttons must be pressed first.  
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.  
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.  
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become  
too high.  
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-  
lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft  
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before  
considering disc player service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES  
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular  
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-  
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened  
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.  
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio  
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-  
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio  
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone  
operation.  
NOTE: There is always a small amount of air entering  
the vehicle even when the fan is turned off. If this  
becomes objectionable during cold weather, place the  
mode control on FLOOR to direct the air flow away from  
passengers.  
Mode Control (Air Direction)  
The mode control allows  
you to choose from sev-  
eral patterns of air distri-  
bution. You can select ei-  
ther a primary mode, as  
identified by the sym-  
bols, or a blend of two of  
CLIMATE CONTROLS  
Heater Only  
The controls are as follows:  
these modes. The center point between modes gives an  
even blend of both modes. The closer the control is to a  
particular mode, the more air distribution you receive  
from that mode.  
Fan Control  
Use this control to regulate the  
amount of air forced through the  
system in any mode you select.  
Turn the control clockwise to in-  
crease fan speed. Turn the control  
to the full counterclockwise posi-  
tion to turn the fan off.  
Panel  
Air is directed through the adjustable outlets in  
the instrument panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103  
Bi-Level  
Air is directed through the panel and floor out-  
Defrost  
Air is directed through the windshield and side  
window demister outlets. Use this setting with  
maximum fan and heat settings for the best wind-  
shield and side window clearing.  
lets.  
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the  
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer  
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved  
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.  
Temperature Control  
Use this control to regu-  
late the temperature of  
the air inside the passen-  
ger compartment. Turn  
the control clockwise to  
increase the temperature  
of the air entering the ve-  
hicle.  
4
Floor  
Air is directed through the floor and side win-  
dow demist outlets with a small amount through  
the defrost outlet.  
Mix  
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and  
side window demist outlets. This setting works  
best in cold or snowy conditions that require  
extra heat at the windshield. This setting is good for  
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the  
windshield.  
Side Window Demisters  
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the  
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air  
toward the side windows when the system is in either the  
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at  
the area of the windows through which you view the  
outside mirrors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Outside Air Intake  
CAUTION!  
When operating the system during the winter months,  
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-  
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions  
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum  
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.  
If your vehicle was not built with air conditioning,  
The manufacturer does not recommend that you  
install any non-factory A/C system. The design of  
add-on air conditioning kits may be inadequate.  
This may cause damage to your engine or other  
components which will not be covered by your  
warranty.  
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use  
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of  
vehicle operation.  
During engine warm-up in cold weather, use the Defrost  
mode to direct any cold air away from the occupants.  
The controls are as follows:  
Fan and Air Conditioning Control  
Use this control to regulate  
the amount of air forced  
through the system in any  
mode you select. The fan  
speeds to the left of the OFF  
position are for Air Condi-  
tioning. Choosing one of  
these speeds turns on the air  
conditioning compressor. The  
Air Conditioning — If Equipped  
The Air Conditioning System allows you to balance the  
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating  
throughout the vehicle.  
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains  
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer  
in the upper atmosphere.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105  
fan speed increases as you move the control counter-  
clockwise from the OFF position.  
Panel  
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-  
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct  
air flow.  
Bi-Level  
Air is directed through the panel and floor out-  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not en-  
gage until the engine has been running for about 10  
seconds.  
Fan speeds to the right of OFF are for heater or ventila-  
tion operation. The fan speed increases as you move the  
control clockwise from the OFF position.  
lets.  
4
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the  
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer  
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved  
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.  
Mode Control (Air Direction)  
The mode control allows you  
to choose from several pat-  
terns of air distribution. You  
can select either a primary  
mode, as identified by the  
symbols, or a blend of two of  
these modes. The center point  
between modes gives an even  
blend of both modes. The  
closer the control is to a par-  
ticular mode, the more air distribution you receive from  
that mode.  
NOTE: If you choose either the Mix or Defrost modes  
while the Circulation control is in the Recirculation  
Mode, the system will automatically switch to the Out-  
side Air mode and the knob will move to that position.  
Floor  
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side  
window demist outlets with a small amount  
through the defrost outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Mix  
Temperature Control  
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side  
window demist outlets. This setting works best  
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra  
heat at the windshield. This setting is good for main-  
taining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind-  
shield.  
Use this control to regulate  
the temperature of the air in-  
side the passenger compart-  
ment. The blue area of the  
scale indicates cooler tem-  
peratures while the red area  
indicates warmer tempera-  
tures.  
Defrost  
Air is directed through the windshield and side  
window demist outlets. Use this mode with  
maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind-  
shield and side window defrosting.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-  
denser located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-  
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray  
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.  
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the  
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in  
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if  
the fan switch is not in the A/ C position. This dehumidi-  
fies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel  
economy, use these modes only when necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107  
Circulation Control  
If the mode control is in the range between Mix and  
Defrost and you choose the Recirculate mode, the mode  
control knob will automatically move to the Mix position.  
Use this control to choose be-  
tween outside air intake or  
recirculation of the air inside  
the vehicle. Only use the re-  
circulate mode to temporarily  
block out any outside odors,  
smoke, or dust and to cool the  
interior rapidly upon initial  
start up in very hot or humid  
weather.  
NOTE: If you choose either the Mix or Defrost modes  
and the Circulation control is in the Recirculate Mode, the  
system will automatically switch to the Outside Air  
position.  
4
This control only operates in the Outside Air and Recir-  
culate modes; there is no in between position. Do not  
place the control between these positions.  
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may  
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may  
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.  
In cold weather, the use of the Recirculate position will  
cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture  
build up inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging,  
select the Outside Air position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Operating Tips  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109  
Window Fogging  
Outside Air Intake  
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild  
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the  
A/ C, PANEL and blower controls. Direct the panel  
outlets toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate  
without A/ C for long periods as fogging may occur.  
When operating the system during the winter months,  
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-  
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions  
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum  
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.  
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-  
moved by using the defrost position.  
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use  
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of  
vehicle operation.  
4
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window  
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-  
ing on the inside surface of the glass  
Side Window Demisters  
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the  
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air  
toward the side windows when the system is in either the  
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at  
the area of the windows through which you view the  
outside mirrors.  
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate  
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because  
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum  
defogging, use the Outside Air position.  
Summer Operation  
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-  
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion  
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for  
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is  
recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER  
A push-button at the center of the instrument  
panel, below the radio, turns the defroster and the  
heated mirrors (if equipped) ON or OFF. An amber light  
shows that the defroster is on.  
CAUTION!  
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not  
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window  
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.  
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm  
water.  
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 10  
minutes of operation. Each following activation of the  
defroster will last for five minutes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING  
CONTENTS  
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
5
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic  
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Starting In Cold Weather  
(Below 32°F Of 0°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Manual Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Extremely Cold Weather  
(Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 116  
Brake/ Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If  
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
2.0L Standard Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
2.0L High Output Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Spark Knock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Fuel Tank Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 136  
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 113  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Warranty Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114 STARTING AND OPERATING  
STARTING PROCEDURES  
Automatic Transaxle  
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both  
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.  
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK  
position before you can start the engine.  
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting  
out of Park.  
CAUTION!  
Manual Transaxle  
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high  
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-  
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave  
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.  
Place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, press the clutch  
pedal to the floor, and fully apply the parking brake  
before starting the engine.  
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal  
is pressed to the floor.  
WARNING!  
Normal Starting  
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does  
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.  
Simply turn the key to the START position and release  
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started  
within 5 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal  
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start  
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait  
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting proce-  
dure.  
Do not leave children or animals inside parked  
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may  
cause serious injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 115  
Starting in Cold Weather (Below 32°F of 0°C)  
Slightly depress and hold the accelerator before starting  
the engine. Turn the key to the START position. When the  
engine starts, release the key, then the accelerator pedal.  
If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, turn the key  
OFF wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal  
starting procedure.  
Extremely Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)  
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an  
externally powered electric engine block heater (available  
from your dealer) is recommended.  
If Engine Fails to Start  
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the  
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.  
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and  
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15  
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the  
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON  
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the  
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.  
WARNING!  
5
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it  
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-  
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could  
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has  
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.  
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables  
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.  
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-  
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6  
of this manual for jump starting instructions.  
WARNING!  
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the  
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start  
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing  
serious personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has  
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle  
speed.  
CAUTION!  
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the  
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to  
15 seconds before trying again.  
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into  
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.  
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is  
firmly on the brake pedal.  
After Starting  
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine  
warms up.  
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal  
down while shifting out of Park.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED  
Brake/Transmission Interlock System  
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out  
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is  
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition  
switch is in the ON positions. Always depress the brake  
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.  
CAUTION!  
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following  
precautions are not observed:  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System  
This system prevents the key from being removed unless  
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push button  
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the  
key is in the ON or RUN positions.  
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 117  
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the  
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety  
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and  
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain  
service.  
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).  
Turn the Key to OFF then restart the engine.  
Shift into D and resume driving.  
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-  
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible  
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to  
determine if the problem could recur.  
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle  
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise  
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat-  
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be  
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci-  
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.  
5
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.  
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic  
Transaxle  
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or  
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.  
Reset Mode  
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal  
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause  
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second  
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the  
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral  
(N) will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in  
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for  
service without damaging the transaxle.  
“P” Park  
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-  
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P  
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking  
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always  
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector  
in P (Park) position.  
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the  
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 STARTING AND OPERATING  
When engaged in P (Park), you will not be able to  
move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift  
lever button.  
WARNING!  
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,  
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is  
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always  
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from  
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the  
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission  
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing  
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-  
more, you should never leave children unattended  
inside a vehicle.  
CAUTION!  
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you  
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the  
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-  
wise, damage to the steering column or shifter could  
result.  
“R” Reverse  
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
The following indicators should be used to ensure that  
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P  
(Park) position:  
“N” Neutral  
Engine may be started in this range.  
When shifting into P (Park), depress the button on the  
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way  
forward until it stops.  
“D” Overdrive  
This range should be used for most city and highway  
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts  
and best fuel economy.  
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to  
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 119  
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the  
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle  
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-  
ing into strong head winds, or while towing trailers), use  
the “3” range.  
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED  
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the  
gear selector placed in REVERSE before leaving the  
vehicle, especially on an incline.  
NOTE: Clutch must be depressed for engine to start.  
“3” Drive  
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle  
will operate normally in first and second while in this  
range.  
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As  
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-  
tor pedal.  
5
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle  
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-  
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc-  
ing excessive shifting and heat build up.  
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be  
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when  
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch  
can result from starting in THIRD.  
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to  
prevent brake system distress.  
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only  
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light  
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.  
“1” Low  
This range should be used for maximum engine braking  
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts  
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down  
shifts from 2nd to first will occur as early as possible.  
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or  
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal  
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the  
clutch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
TABLE 2-MANUAL TRANSAXLE RECOMMENDED  
SHIFT SPEEDS  
IN MPH (KM/ H)  
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-  
cant has warmed, you may have difficulty shifting. This  
is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.  
ENGINE  
SIZE  
CRUISE SHIFT SPEEDS  
1 to 2  
12  
2 to 3  
18  
3 to 4  
25  
4 to 5  
32  
Recommended Shift Speeds  
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,  
it should be upshifted as listed in tables 1 and 2.  
2.0L  
(19)  
(29)  
(40)  
(51)  
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may  
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in table 3  
(within legal speed limits).  
TABLE 1-MANUAL TRANSAXLE RECOMMENDED  
SHIFT SPEEDS  
IN MPH (KM/ H)  
TABLE 3-MANUAL TRANSAXLE RECOMMENDED  
SHIFT SPEEDS  
ENGINE  
SIZE  
NORMAL ACCELERATION SHIFT  
SPEEDS  
IN MPH (KM/ H)  
1 to 2  
14  
2 to 3  
23  
3 to 4  
29  
4 to 5  
45  
ENGINE  
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCESHIFT  
SPEEDS  
2.0L  
SIZE  
2.0L  
1 to 2  
30  
2 to 3  
50  
3 to 4  
80  
4 to 5  
110  
(23)  
(37)  
(47)  
(72)  
(48)  
(80)  
(129)  
(177)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 121  
If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut  
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the  
engine computer. The engine will run normally when  
you reduce engine speed.  
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade, shift  
down early so that the engine will not be overburdened.  
PARKING BRAKE  
When the parking brake is applied with the  
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument  
cluster will come on.  
Downshifting  
Proper downshifting may improve fuel economy and  
prolong engine life.  
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is  
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.  
5
CAUTION!  
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting  
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could  
damage the engine, transaxle, or clutch.  
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift  
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking  
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on  
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position  
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To  
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and pull  
up on the parking brake lever. Push the release button  
and lower the lever fully.  
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking  
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise  
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may  
make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As an  
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb  
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill  
grade.  
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 123  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
WARNING!  
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as  
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for  
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications  
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The  
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater  
than that required with the power system operating.  
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-  
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others  
could be injured. Children should be warned not  
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.  
Dont leave the keys in the ignition. A child could  
operate power windows, other controls, or move  
the vehicle.  
WARNING!  
5
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake  
failure and an accident.  
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting  
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and  
possible brake damage. You wouldnt have your full  
braking capacity in an emergency.  
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-  
bility, the remaining system will still function with some  
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident  
by increased pedal travel during application and greater  
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124 STARTING AND OPERATING  
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake  
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning  
indicator will light.  
WARNING!  
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-  
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor  
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-  
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle  
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped  
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake  
performance under most braking conditions. The system  
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking  
conditions to prevent wheel lock up.  
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including  
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,  
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-  
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver  
can prevent accidents.  
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and  
tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate  
signals for the computer. However, the system will  
compensate when the compact spare is in use.  
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the users safety  
or the safety of others.  
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the  
brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises  
may be heard.  
NOTE: Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the  
effectiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an  
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.  
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to  
slow down or stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 125  
POWER STEERING  
NOTE:  
The power assisted steering system of your vehicle  
provides mechanical steering capability in the event  
power assist is lost.  
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded  
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-  
ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.  
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,  
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these  
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in  
steering effort.  
European Metric tire sizing is based on European  
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have  
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with  
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire  
size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H  
5
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  
Tire Markings  
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.  
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric  
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the  
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-  
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.  
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact  
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.  
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”  
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-  
tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.  
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded  
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Sizing Chart  
EXAMPLE:  
Size Designation:  
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards  
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards  
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards  
T = Temporary Spare tire  
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)  
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)  
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)  
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.  
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)  
R = Construction Code  
ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.  
ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.  
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 127  
EXAMPLE:  
Service Description:  
95 = Load Index  
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.  
H = Speed Symbol  
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding  
to its load index under certain operating conditions.  
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-  
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and  
posted speed limits).  
5
Load Identification:  
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire  
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire  
Light Load = Light Load Tire  
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure  
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.  
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this  
tire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on  
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side  
of the tire.  
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire  
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires  
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including  
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.  
EXAMPLE:  
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301  
DOT = Department of Transportation  
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire  
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.  
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)  
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)  
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)  
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)  
—03 means the 3rd week.  
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)  
—01 means the year 2001.  
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in  
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 129  
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure  
Tire and Loading Information Placard  
Tire Placard Location  
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Infor-  
mation” placard located on the drivers side “Bpillar.  
5
This placard tells you important information about  
the,  
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle  
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry  
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle  
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear  
and spare tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Loading  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You  
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you  
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire  
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of  
this manual.  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on  
your vehicles placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-  
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.  
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,  
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear  
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on  
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the  
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of  
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo  
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =  
650 lb.)  
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your  
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The  
combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and  
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed  
the weight referenced here.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo  
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 131  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your  
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this reduces the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-  
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the  
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.  
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392  
Kg).  
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to  
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities  
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 133  
1. Safety—  
WARNING!  
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading  
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and  
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the  
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never  
overload them.  
WARNING!  
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  
cause accidents.  
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can  
result in tire failure.  
Over inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion  
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause  
damage that results in tire failure.  
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION  
5
Tire Pressure  
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary  
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:  
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-  
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.  
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect  
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right  
or left.  
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-  
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134 STARTING AND OPERATING  
2. Economy—  
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear  
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal  
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for  
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire  
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.  
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—  
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.  
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.  
Tire Inflation Pressures  
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars  
is listed on either the face of the drivers door or the  
drivers side “Bpillar. For vehicles other than passenger  
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either  
the “Bpillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire  
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.  
“B” PILLAR  
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as  
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least  
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to  
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement  
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look  
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.  
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the  
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-  
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Information” section of this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 135  
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the  
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire  
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),  
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this  
outside temperature condition.  
CAUTION!  
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-  
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This  
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the  
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.  
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)  
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure  
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.  
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always  
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure  
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not  
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile  
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation  
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-  
sure molded into the tire side wall.  
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation  
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds  
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-  
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very  
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle  
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-  
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading  
and cold tire inflation pressures.  
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with  
temperature changes.  
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per  
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind  
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in  
the winter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped  
WARNING!  
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with  
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style  
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the  
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-  
stalled at the first opportunity.  
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-  
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your  
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a  
serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the  
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75  
mph (120 km/h).  
WARNING!  
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.  
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80  
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread  
life. When two or more tread wear indicators appear in  
adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare tire needs to  
be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which  
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in  
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Radial-Ply Tires  
WARNING!  
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires  
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle  
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-  
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case  
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine  
them with other types of tires.  
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a  
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the  
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.  
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in  
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your  
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.  
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/ wheel  
on the vehicle at any given time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 137  
Tread Wear Indicators  
CAUTION!  
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires  
to help you in determining when your tires should be  
replaced.  
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take  
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the  
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may  
result.  
Tire Spinning  
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not  
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).  
5
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section  
6 of this manual.  
WARNING!  
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread  
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth  
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear  
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.  
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated  
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or  
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do  
not spin your vehicles wheels faster than 35 mph (55  
km/h) when you are stuck. And dont let anyone near a  
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.  
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this  
point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Replacement Tires  
WARNING!  
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for  
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-  
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-  
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance  
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread  
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The  
service description and load identification will be found  
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent  
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-  
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you  
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-  
cations or capability.  
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than  
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-  
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change  
suspension dimensions and performance charac-  
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-  
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause  
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and  
suspension components. You could lose control  
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or  
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load  
ratings approved for your vehicle.  
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  
capacity, other than what was originally equipped  
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load  
index could result in tire overloading and failure.  
You could lose control and have an accident.  
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having  
adequate speed capability can result in sudden  
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 139  
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.  
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer  
for proper diagnosis.  
CAUTION!  
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-  
ings.  
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.  
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-  
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and  
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.  
Alignment And Balance  
Poor suspension alignment may result in:  
Tire Chains  
5
Fast tire wear.  
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,  
chains that meet SAE class “S” requirements can be used,  
but they must be installed on tire sizes P175/ 70R14,  
185/ 65R14, P185/ 65R14, 185/ 60R15, or P185/ 60R15 tires.  
Contact your local dealership or tire dealer for these tire  
sizes.  
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided  
wear.  
Vehicle pull to right or left.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Snow Tires  
CAUTION!  
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires  
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type  
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S  
designation on the tire side wall.  
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the  
following precautions:  
Because of restricted chain clearance between  
tires and other suspension components, it is im-  
portant that only chains in good condition are  
used. Broken chains can cause serious damage.  
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that  
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the dam-  
aged parts of the chain before further use.  
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and  
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only  
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the  
safety and handling of your vehicle.  
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as  
possible and then retighten after driving about 2  
mile (0.8 km).  
Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).  
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large  
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.  
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-  
ment.  
Observe the tire chain manufacturers instructions  
on the method of installation, operating speed,  
and conditions for use. Always use the lower  
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-  
turer if different than the speed recommended by  
the manufacture.  
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what  
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should  
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120  
km/ h).  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 141  
Tire Rotation Recommendations  
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at  
different loads and perform different steering, driving  
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at  
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-  
terns.  
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.  
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type  
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain  
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a  
smooth, quiet ride.  
5
FUEL REQUIREMENTS  
2.0L Standard Engine  
Your engine is designed to meet all emis-  
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel  
economy and performance when using  
high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline  
having an octane rating of 87. The use of  
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your  
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”  
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-  
sible if desired. The suggested rotation method is the  
“forward-cross” shown in the diagram.  
premium gasoline is not recommended.  
The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over  
high quality regular gasolines, and in some circum-  
stances may result in poorer performance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142 STARTING AND OPERATING  
2.0L High Output Engine  
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world  
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-  
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define  
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,  
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The  
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet  
the WWFC specifications if they are available.  
Your engine is designed to meet all emis-  
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel  
economy and performance when using  
high quality unleaded gasoline having an  
octane rating of 91. The purchase of higher  
octane is not recommended.  
High quality unleaded gasoline having a minumum  
octane rating of 87 may safely be used for your vehicle.  
Use of these lower octane gasolines, however, may result  
in reduced acceleration performance.  
Reformulated Gasoline  
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  
burning fuel referred to as Reformulated Gasoline. Re-  
formulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifi-  
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve  
air quality.  
Spark Knock  
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at  
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is  
required. Engine damage resulting from operation with a  
heavy spark knock may not be covered by the new  
vehicle warranty.  
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-  
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-  
vide excellent performance and durability for the engine  
and fuel system components.  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends  
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these  
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-  
fore considering service for the vehicle.  
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-  
rials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and  
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 143  
country during the winter months to reduce carbon  
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-  
ates may be used in your vehicle.  
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-  
mends that gasolines free of MMT be used in your  
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-  
cated on the gasoline pump, therefore you should ask  
your gasoline retailer whether or not his/ her gasoline  
contains MMT.  
CAUTION!  
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Gaso-  
line containing methanol may damage critical fuel  
system components.  
It is even more important to look for gasolines without  
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher  
levels than allowed in the United States.  
5
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California refor-  
mulated gasolines.  
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline  
blends are not the responsibility of The manufacturer and  
may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. While MTBE  
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have  
the negative effects of Methanol.  
Sulfur in Gasoline  
Your vehicle may have been designed to meet California  
low emission standards with cleaner burning California  
reformulated gasoline with low sulfur. This vehicle may  
be sold nationwide. Your vehicle will operate satisfacto-  
rily on fuels meeting Federal specifications, but emission  
control system performance may be adversely affected.  
MMT in Gasoline  
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines  
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage  
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without  
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to  
reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system  
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have  
higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of  
the vehicles catalytic converter. This may cause the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Malfunction Indicator light to illuminate. The manufac-  
turer recommends that you try a different brand of  
unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the  
problem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to  
an authorized dealer for service.  
Fuel System Cautions  
CAUTION!  
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles  
performance:  
CAUTION!  
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.  
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,  
damage the emission control system, and could result  
in loss of warranty coverage.  
If the Check Engine or Service Engine Soon light is  
flashing, immediate service is required. See the On  
Board Diagnostics paragraph in the Maintenance  
section of this manual.  
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition  
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to  
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or  
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or  
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.  
Contact your dealer for service assistance.  
Materials Added to Fuel  
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to  
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional  
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal  
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-  
fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as  
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these  
products contain high concentrations of methanol.  
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 145  
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not  
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be  
covered under the New Vehicle Warranty.  
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-  
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time  
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions  
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side  
windows fully open.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to  
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-  
haust gases from entering the vehicle.  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings  
5
ADDING FUEL  
WARNING!  
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door  
about 2 inches (50 mm) down from the opening. If fuel is  
poured from a portable container, the container should  
have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the  
restricting door.  
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.  
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon  
monoxide poisoning:  
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon  
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.  
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a  
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is  
stopped in an open area with the engine running for  
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system  
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.  
Fuel Tank Filler Cap  
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-  
gers side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,  
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use  
with this vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146 STARTING AND OPERATING  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
Damage to the fuel system or emission control  
system could result from using an improper fuel  
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap  
could let impurities into the fuel system.  
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top  
off” the fuel tank after filling.  
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/ 4 turn until you  
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is  
properly tightened.  
CAUTION!  
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunc-  
tion Indicator light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is  
tightened every time the vehicle is fueled.  
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp to turn on.  
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the  
fuel tank is full.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 147  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)  
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck  
which may cause injury.  
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You  
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the  
ground while filling.  
The volatility of some gasolines may cause a build  
up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase  
while you drive. This pressure can result in a  
spray of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove  
the cap from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap  
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents  
fuel spray.  
VEHICLE LOADING  
5
Vehicle Loading Capacities  
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs. (52 kg)  
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 lbs. (392 kg)  
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near  
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the  
tank filled.  
Never add fuel when the engine is running.  
Turn off engine.  
Rotate the gas cap to the left to remove.  
To replace the cap, insert it into the filler neck and  
tighten to the right until at least one click is heard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148 STARTING AND OPERATING  
TRAILER TOWING  
Warranty Requirements  
In this section you will find safety tips and information  
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do  
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-  
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and  
safely as possible.  
The Manufacturers Passenger Vehicle Warranty will  
apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for non-commercial  
use. However the following conditions must be met:  
The maximum trailer load for vehicles with the Stan-  
dard 2.0L Engine and manual tranaxles is 1,500 lbs  
(680 kg).  
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements  
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-  
hicles used for trailer towing.  
The maximum trailer load for vehicles with the Stan-  
dard 2.0L Engine and automatic transaxles is 1,000 lbs  
(454 kg).  
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the main-  
tenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for  
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating  
(GAWR) by the addition of:  
Trailer towing is not recommended for vehicles with  
the optional 2.0L Magnum Engine (R/ T) and manual  
transaxle.  
If using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer towing,  
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive  
clutch slippage.  
The tongue weight of the trailer.  
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment  
put in or on your vehicle.  
The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed  
20 square feet (1.86 square meters).  
Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds  
to the load on your vehicle.  
The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of  
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and  
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 149  
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–  
Safety Information Section in this manual.  
The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be  
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more  
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule  
B” in section 8 of this manual for transaxle fluid  
change intervals.  
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,  
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”  
range must be selected.  
NOTE: Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before  
towing.  
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle  
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-  
mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive  
shifting and heat build up.  
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using  
the Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,  
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range  
should be selected that allows for adequate performance.  
For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be  
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the  
desired speed.  
5
WARNING!  
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic  
brake lines can overload your brake system and  
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you  
need them and could have an accident.  
NOTE: Extended driving at high RPM should be  
avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in  
vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving  
at high RPM. Retirn to a higher gear range or vehicle  
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.  
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact  
spare tire.  
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer  
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are  
recommended for motoring safety.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
CONTENTS  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . 157  
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
6
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle  
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The  
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the  
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition  
key removed and the vehicle locked.  
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down  
your battery.  
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS  
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the  
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.  
On the highways — Slow down.  
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in  
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.  
The flasher switch is on top of the steering column,  
just behind the steering wheel. Depress the switch  
and both cluster indicators and all front and rear direc-  
tional signals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn  
Hazard Warning Flashers off.  
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down  
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner  
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to  
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C  
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature  
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and  
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act  
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  
from the engine cooling system.  
Do not use this emergency warning system when the  
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled  
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 153  
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING  
CAUTION!  
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage  
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull  
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the  
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops  
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on  
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for  
service.  
WARNING!  
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.  
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.  
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your  
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start  
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If  
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a  
service center where it can be raised on a lift.  
6
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off  
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when  
operating the jack or changing the wheel.  
WARNING!  
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or  
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling  
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your  
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the  
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this  
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling  
System Pressure Cap paragraph.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Preparations For Jacking  
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or  
slippery areas, and set the parking brake. Place the gear  
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE  
(manual transaxle).  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.  
Block both the front and rear  
of the wheel diagonally oppo-  
site the jacking position. For  
example, if changing the right  
front tire, block the left rear  
wheel.  
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the  
vehicle is being jacked.  
Instructions  
The spare wheel, scissors jack, and lug wrench are  
stowed under the spare tire cover in the rear cargo area.  
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning  
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the  
ground.  
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.  
1. Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and lug wrench  
from stowage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 155  
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is  
securely engaged.  
CAUTION!  
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the  
crossmember below the radiator or on the front  
suspension crossmember.  
3. Jack saddle support must be positioned in between  
locating darts at the front of the vehicle and behind  
locating dart at the rear. Turn the jack screw to the right  
until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area  
closest to the wheel to be changed.  
6
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.  
Raise the vehicle only until the tire clears the surface.  
Miminum tire lift provides maximum vehicle stability.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel  
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.  
WARNING!  
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make  
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and  
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough  
to remove the tire.  
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.  
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench  
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each  
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is  
100 ft. lbs. (135 N·m). If you are not sure about the  
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by  
your dealer or at a service station.  
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel  
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare  
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the  
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid  
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten  
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.  
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is  
free. Stow the lug wrench, replaced tire, and jack. Secure  
all parts using the means provided.  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel  
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp  
edges.  
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or  
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-  
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in  
the places provided.  
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the  
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly  
9. Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 157  
NOTE: The spare tire well is designed to hold the  
compact spare tire or a deflated (flat) tire. A fully inflated  
tire will not fit in the spare tire well.  
WARNING!  
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it  
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-  
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could  
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has  
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.  
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables  
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.  
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-  
erly, so follow this procedure carefully.  
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS  
LOW  
WARNING!  
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever  
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition  
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.  
6
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry  
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an  
inadvertent electrical contact.  
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park  
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without  
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-  
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-  
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.  
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical  
loads.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive  
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end to  
the positive terminal of the discharged battery.  
WARNING!  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not  
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.  
Dont lean over battery when attaching clamps or  
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes  
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area  
immediately with large quantities of water.  
WARNING!  
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this  
could establish a ground connection and personal  
injury could result.  
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-  
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away  
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or  
any other booster source with an output that exceeds  
12 volts.  
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal  
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the  
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have  
a good contact on the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 159  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the  
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark  
could cause the battery to explode.  
Any procedure other than above could result in:  
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting  
out the battery vent;  
During cold weather when temperatures are below  
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery  
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because  
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery  
temperature must be brought up above freezing  
point before attempting to jump start.  
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery  
explosion;  
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or  
of immobilized vehicle.  
6
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES  
6. If the vehicle is equipped with sentry key immobilizer,  
turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position for 3  
seconds prior to moving the ignition switch to the crank  
position and starting the vehicle.  
Acceleration  
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-  
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-  
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when  
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front  
(driving) wheels, particularly with high output engines.  
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster  
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the  
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.  
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above  
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
4. Keep tires properly inflated.  
WARNING!  
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and  
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden  
stop.  
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-  
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of  
the front wheels. You could lose control of the  
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate  
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be  
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).  
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE  
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it  
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your  
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the  
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse  
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-  
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the  
wheels is most effective.  
Traction  
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a  
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or  
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To  
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should  
be observed:  
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are  
slushy.  
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.  
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become  
visible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 161  
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
With Ignition Key  
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-  
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-  
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure  
someone. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster  
than 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And dont  
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the  
speed.  
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle  
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-  
tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the  
gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be  
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the  
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/ h). If the  
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed  
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed  
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to  
the transaxle.  
6
CAUTION!  
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast  
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can  
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above  
35 mph (55km/h).  
Manual Transaxle  
Your vehicle may be towed if the gearshift lever is in  
NEUTRAL. If the transaxle is not operative, the vehicle  
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
All Transaxles  
Without The Ignition Key  
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed  
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be  
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.  
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-  
age to the vehicle.  
CAUTION!  
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the  
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in  
the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.  
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat  
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)  
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it  
may be towed at any legal highway speed, for any  
distance, if the transaxle is in neutral.  
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed  
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON  
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the  
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.  
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-  
matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
2.0L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 166  
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 179  
Windshield Washer Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Emissions Inspection And Maintenance  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Ignition Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 174  
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Air Cleaner Element (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Hoses And Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 184  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Front Park/ Turn Signal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Front Sidemarker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Appearance Care And Protection From  
Tail/ Stop, Rear Turn Signals And Back-Up  
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Underhood Fuses  
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine  
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 165  
2.0L ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  
CAUTION!  
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard  
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors  
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic  
transmission control systems. When these systems are  
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent  
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-  
sions well within current government regulations.  
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-  
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the  
emission control system. It could also affect fuel  
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be  
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-  
formed.  
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system  
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will  
also store diagnostic codes and other information to  
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-  
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not  
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as  
possible.  
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing  
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-  
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.  
Immediate service is required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 167  
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
PROGRAMS  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank  
or start the engine.  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass  
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.  
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.  
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start  
this test over.  
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you  
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal  
bulb check.  
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and  
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the  
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)  
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,  
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready  
for testing.  
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will  
happen:  
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then  
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off  
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that  
your vehicles OBD system is not ready and you  
should not proceed to the I/ M station.  
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD  
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently  
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery  
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined  
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.  
7
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully  
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or  
start the engine. This means that your vehicles OBD  
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/ M  
station.  
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test  
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To  
check if your vehicles OBD system is ready, you must do  
the following:  
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your  
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was  
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,  
you may need to do nothing more than drive your  
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD  
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine  
may then indicate that the system is now ready.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS  
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled main-  
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the  
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the  
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will  
not be covered by the manufacturer warranty.  
DEALER SERVICE  
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD system is  
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated  
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your  
vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M station. The I/ M  
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on  
with the engine running.  
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special  
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in  
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which  
include detailed service information for your vehicle.  
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure  
yourself.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 169  
Engine Oil  
WARNING!  
Checking Oil Level  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.  
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform  
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent  
mechanic.  
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must  
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at  
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.  
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5  
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, or before  
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.  
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance  
services determined by the engineers who designed your  
vehicle.  
7
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed  
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should  
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.  
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it  
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.  
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is  
observed or suspected.  
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will  
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the  
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at  
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these  
engines.  
Change Engine Oil  
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the  
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the  
following list to decide if any apply to you.  
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)  
Stop and Go driving  
CAUTION!  
Overfilling or underfilling will cause aeration or  
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.  
Extensive engine idling  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)  
Trailer towing  
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)  
Off-road or desert operation  
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 171  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule “Bof the  
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
Engine Oil Selection  
For best performance and maximum protection under all  
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only  
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet  
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard  
MS-6395.  
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil  
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-  
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil  
Identification Symbol  
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change  
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months  
whichever comes first.  
This symbol means that the oil has  
been certified by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). The  
manufacturer only recommends  
API Certified engine oils.  
7
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart  
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be  
selected based on the following recommendation and be  
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil  
viscosity chart.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and  
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-  
ditives.  
Disposing of Used Engine Oil  
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from  
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can  
present a problem to the environment. Contact your  
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice  
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in  
your area.  
Engine Oil Filter  
Synthetic Engine Oils  
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine  
oil change.  
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as  
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use  
such a product, use only those oils that are American  
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and SAE viscosity  
standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your  
driving type.  
Engine Oil Filter Selection  
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type  
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-  
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-  
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure  
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high  
quality oil filters and are recommended.  
Materials Added To Engine Oils  
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-  
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 173  
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension  
Catalytic Converter  
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,  
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.  
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.  
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel  
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the  
catalyst as an emission control device.  
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or  
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage  
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-  
quired, adjust the belts according to the specifications  
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.  
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-  
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-  
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure  
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst  
damage.  
Special tools are required to properly measure tension  
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,  
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference  
between the belts and other engine components.  
CAUTION!  
7
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In  
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-  
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-  
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-  
Spark Plugs  
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-  
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-  
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be  
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark  
plug. Check the specifications section for the proper type  
of spark plug for use in your vehicle.  
ued operation of your vehicle with  
a
severe  
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,  
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  
disconnected for prolonged period.  
WARNING!  
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over  
materials that can burn. Such materials might be  
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-  
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in  
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-  
thing that can burn.  
Engine Timing Belt  
Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described  
in the appropriate maintenance schedule.  
Ignition Wiring System  
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly  
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,  
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.  
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe  
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop  
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.  
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-  
tions, should be obtained immediately.  
Crankcase Emission Control System  
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom  
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle  
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may  
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,  
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO  
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:  
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition  
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or  
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.  
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 175  
Fuel Filter  
Maintenance-Free Battery  
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the  
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an  
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,  
frequent filter replacement may be necessary.  
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-  
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is  
periodic maintenance required.  
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)  
CAUTION!  
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the  
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive the  
vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the  
filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced  
if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule “B.  
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the  
battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides bat-  
tery heat protection and will extend overall battery  
life. Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in  
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.  
7
WARNING!  
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection  
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air  
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or  
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the  
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with  
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in  
serious personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-  
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after  
handling.  
It is essential when replacing the cables on the  
battery that the positive cable is attached to the  
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the  
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)  
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.  
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts  
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and  
clamps after tightening.  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can  
burn or even blind you. Dont allow battery fluid to  
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Dont lean over a  
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in  
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with  
large amounts of water.  
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the  
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-  
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a  
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery  
damage can result.  
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame  
or sparks away from the battery. Dont use a booster  
battery or any other booster source with an output  
greater than 12 volts. Dont allow cable clamps to  
touch each other.  
Air Conditioner  
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the  
warm weather season.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-  
denser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 177  
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and  
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia  
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing  
air conditioning performance.  
Conditioners, Compressor Oils, or Refrigerants not ap-  
proved by the manufacturer, voids the warranty for the  
Air Conditioning system.  
Power Steering Fluid Check  
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined  
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be  
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are  
apparent, and/ or the system is not functioning as antici-  
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified  
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.  
WARNING!  
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant  
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury  
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any  
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be  
done by an experienced repairman.  
WARNING!  
7
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling  
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and  
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving  
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do  
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended  
power steering fluid.  
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains  
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer  
in the upper atmosphere, the manufacturer recommends  
that air conditioning service be done by facilities using  
refrigerant recycling and recovery equipment that meets  
SAE standard J1991.  
NOTE: Air Conditioning systems found to be contami-  
nated with A/ C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated  
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all  
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and  
Genuine Parts for correct fluid types.  
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a  
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small  
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MoparLock  
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.  
Front Suspension Ball Joints  
Windshield Wiper Blades  
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are  
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-  
ever under-vehicle service is done. Damaged seals  
should be replaced to prevent leakage or grease contami-  
nation.  
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a  
mild non abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent. This  
will remove accumulations of salt or road film and help  
reduce streaking and smearing.  
Body Lubrication  
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods  
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use  
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to  
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that  
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to  
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of  
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,  
gasoline, etc.  
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as  
seat tracks, doors, trunk and hood hinges, should be  
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation  
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-  
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be  
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating  
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular  
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-  
nents to insure proper function. When performing other  
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism  
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 179  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement  
Windshield Washer Aiming  
To change the aim of the windshield washers, place a  
safety pin into the nozzle opening and move the nozzle  
slightly. Continue making slight adjustments until you  
obtain the desired pattern.  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.  
2. Rotate the blade 45 degrees to gain access to the  
release tab.  
3. Push the release tab shown in the picture and slide the  
wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently place  
the wiper arm on the windshield.  
Windshield Washer Reservoir  
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine  
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at  
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield  
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)  
Exhaust System  
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  
system.  
7
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;  
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or  
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;  
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust  
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,  
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or  
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep  
4. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip  
until it locks in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the  
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-  
cation or oil change. Replace as required.  
Cooling System  
WARNING!  
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-  
WARNING!  
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition key  
to the OFF position. The fan is temperature con-  
trolled and can start at any time the ignition key is  
in the ON position.  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide which is colorless and odorless. Breathing  
it can make you unconscious and can eventually  
poison you. Follow the above precautions to keep  
your exhaust system as safe as possible.  
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant  
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear  
steam coming from under the hood, dont open  
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.  
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap  
when the radiator is hot.  
Coolant Checks  
Check coolant protection every 12 months (before the  
onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is  
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be  
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 181  
Check the front of the radiator for an accumulation of  
bugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator by gently spraying  
water from a garden hose at the back of the core.  
Engine Coolant Disposal  
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated  
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your  
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your  
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine  
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in  
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals or  
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician  
immediately.  
Check the recovery bottle tank tubing for condition and  
tightness of connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect  
the entire system for leaks.  
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but  
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for  
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of  
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing  
properly, the coolant will begin to drain from the reserve  
tank. Do not remove the cap when the cooling system is  
hot.  
Selection Of Coolant  
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer  
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
for correct coolant type.  
7
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill  
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,  
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.  
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable  
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable  
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to  
remove all deposits and chemicals. Discard oil antifreeze  
solution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Adding Coolant  
CAUTION!  
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% eth-  
ylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water should be used.  
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-  
tures below –34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.  
Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-  
HOAT), may result in engine damage that may not  
be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and  
decreased corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-  
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an  
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified  
coolant as soon as possible.  
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized  
water when mixing the water/ antifreeze solution. The  
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of  
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.  
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base anti-  
freeze products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-  
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-  
ible with the radiator coolant and may plug the  
radiator.  
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-  
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-  
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where  
the vehicle is operated.  
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the  
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant  
changes.  
This vehicle has not been designed for use with  
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene  
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.  
Cooling System Pressure Cap  
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of  
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the  
radiator from the coolant reserve tank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 183  
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any  
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.  
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your  
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating  
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only  
be checked once a month.  
WARNING!  
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the  
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.  
never add coolant when the engine is overheated. Do  
not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated  
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the  
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not  
remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or  
under pressure.  
7
Coolant Level  
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for  
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the  
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-  
ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be  
between the “FULL” and “ADD” marks.  
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the  
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do  
not overfill.  
Points to Remember  
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is  
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for  
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of  
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of  
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumula-  
tion on the radiator and being vaporized when the  
thermostat opens, allowing hot water to enter the radia-  
tor.  
F. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle has  
air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean,  
also.  
G. Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter  
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY  
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in  
unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage,  
and increased emissions.  
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no  
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be  
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.  
A. Do not overfill the coolant bottle.  
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses  
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence  
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,  
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tear, cuts, abrasions,  
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rub-  
ber.  
B. Check coolant freeze point in the system.  
C. If frequent coolant additions are required, the cooling  
system should be pressure tested for leaks.  
D. Maintain coolant concentration at 50% ethylene glycol  
antifreeze (minimum) in water for proper corrosion pro-  
tection of your engine which contains aluminum compo-  
nents.  
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat  
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-  
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or  
moving component that may cause heat damage or  
mechanical wear.  
E. Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses  
are not kinked or obstructed.  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 185  
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-  
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are  
present.  
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses  
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,  
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of  
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,  
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive  
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular  
attention should be made to examining those hose sur-  
faces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust  
manifold.  
Components should be replaced immediately if there is  
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.  
Brake System  
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake  
system components should be inspected periodically.  
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-  
nance Section.  
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they  
are secure and no leaks are present.  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed.  
WARNING!  
7
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting  
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and  
possible brake damage. You wouldnt have your full  
braking capacity in an emergency.  
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,  
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-  
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-  
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-  
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot  
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle  
operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based  
on leakage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done  
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine  
oil change.  
WARNING!  
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.  
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of  
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake  
hoses replaced immediately.  
Brake Master Cylinder  
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer  
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
for correct fluid type.  
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked  
when performing under hood services, or immediately if  
the brake system warning lamp is on.  
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before  
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the  
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake  
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the  
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked  
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be  
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.  
WARNING!  
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial  
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may  
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-  
longed braking. You could have an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 187  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in  
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the  
brake fluid catching fire.  
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-  
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration  
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter  
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the  
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in  
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to  
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
for correct fluid type.  
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed  
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.  
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the  
brake fluid as seal damage will result!  
Automatic Transaxle  
Fluid Level Check  
All front wheel drive vehicles have a transaxle and  
differential assembly contained within a single housing.  
7
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be  
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with  
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the  
transaxle and of the fluid.  
Selection of Lubricant  
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the  
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use  
only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid,  
refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that the  
transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level  
using the recommended fluid.  
Procedure for Checking Fluid Level  
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal  
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles  
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature,  
which is approximately180°F ( 82°C), the fluid cannot be  
held comfortably between the fingertips.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure  
must be used:  
reference holes when the transmission reaches 180°F  
(82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the  
normal operating temperature.  
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.  
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for at  
minimum of 60 seconds.  
3. Fully apply parking brake.  
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear  
position ending with the lever in P (PARK).  
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until  
seated.  
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on  
both sides. The fluid level should be in the crosshatch  
area at normal operating temperatures. If the fluid is low,  
add as required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill.  
If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmission  
fluid to bring to the proper level.  
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission  
below the operating temperature, the fluid level should  
be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick  
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C) (room tem-  
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at  
room temperature, it should be between the HOT (upper)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 189  
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid  
and filter should be changed.  
CAUTION!  
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can  
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water  
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-  
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is  
seated properly.  
Special Additives  
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of  
any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to  
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting  
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be  
avoided as they may adversely affect seals.  
Fluid and Filter Changes  
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be  
changed as follows:  
Manual Transaxle  
Lubricant Selection  
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission  
fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and  
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.  
Maintenance schedule “A” No change necessary.  
7
Maintenance schedule “B” – Every 60,000 miles (96 000  
km) change fluid and filter under the following condi-  
tions:  
Fluid Level Check  
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid  
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a  
point not more that 3/ 16” (4.76 mm) below the bottom of  
the hole.  
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or  
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for  
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.  
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.  
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-  
nance schedules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Frequency of Fluid Change  
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will  
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-  
body protection.  
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at  
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of  
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the  
following conditions exist:  
The following maintenance recommendations will enable  
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  
resistance built into your vehicle.  
The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If  
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed  
immediately.  
What Causes Corrosion?  
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of  
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.  
If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance  
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.  
The most common causes are:  
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion  
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.  
Stone and gravel impact.  
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion  
Vehicle body car requirements vary according to geo-  
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads  
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on  
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly  
corrosive to the metal in you vehicle. Outside parking,  
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,  
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme  
Insects, tree sap and tar.  
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.  
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 191  
Washing  
CAUTION!  
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-  
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and  
rinse the panels completely with clear water.  
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will  
scratch metal and painted surfaces. Many wheel  
cleaners contain acids that may harm the wheel  
surface.  
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-  
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.  
Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains  
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch  
the paint.  
Special Care  
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive  
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once  
a month.  
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing  
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint  
finish.  
7
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges  
of the doors, rocker panels and rear deck lid be kept  
clear and open.  
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,  
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is  
considered the responsibility of the owner.  
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches or chips as  
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to  
match the color of your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or  
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective  
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-  
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-  
sibility of the owner.  
Only Mopar Wheel Cleaners are recommended. Any of  
the “DO NOT USE” items listed below can damage  
wheels and wheel trim.  
DO NOT USE:  
Any abrasive cleaner  
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,  
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well  
packaged and sealed.  
Any abrasive cleaning pad (such as steel wool) or  
abrasive brush  
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider  
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.  
Any cleaner that contains an acid which can react with  
and discolor the chrome surface.  
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care  
All wheels and wheel trim, especially Aluminum and  
Chrome plated, should be cleaned regularly, using mild  
soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent  
corrosion. Wash them with the same soap solution as the  
body of your vehicle. Rinse wheels thoroughly.  
CAUTION!  
Many wheel cleaners contain acids that may harm  
the wheel surface.  
Oven cleaner  
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, care must be  
taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi-  
cals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.  
A car wash that uses carbide-tipped wheel cleaning  
brushes or acidic solutions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 193  
Interior Care  
WARNING!  
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and  
carpeting.  
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.  
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in  
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.  
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery.  
Mopar Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for  
vinyl trim.  
Cleaning Headlights  
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular  
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt  
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery  
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.  
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth  
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid  
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please  
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-  
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather  
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not  
required to maintain the original condition.  
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and  
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.  
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.  
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and  
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-  
lowed by rinsing.  
7
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel  
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Glass Surfaces  
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be  
used, but do not use high alcohol content of abrasive  
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp  
rag.  
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis  
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.  
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when  
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric  
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-  
ments which may scratch the elements.  
2. Dry with a soft tissue.  
Seat Belt Maintenance  
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical  
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.  
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.  
Instrument Panel Cover  
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which  
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use  
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-  
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the  
low glare surface.  
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or  
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the  
vehicle to wash them.  
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses  
The lenses in front of the instruments in the vehicle are  
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care  
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.  
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  
buckles do not work properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 195  
FUSES  
Interior Fuses  
The fuse access panel is behind the end cover at the left  
side of the instrument panel. To remove the panel, pull it  
out, as shown. A diagram identifying the components  
and circuits is located on the inside of the cover.  
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)  
A Power Distribution Center is located in the engine  
compartment; next to the battery. A label identifying the  
components and circuits is located on the underside of  
the cover.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
REPLACEMENT BULBS  
CAUTION!  
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use  
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The  
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may  
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a  
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a  
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.  
LIGHT BULBS — Inside  
Bulb No.  
ABS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Airbag Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Brake System Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194  
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579  
Front Fog Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194  
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194  
Low Fuel Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Low Oil Pressure Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906  
Seat Belt Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Security Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194  
Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED  
VEHICLE STORAGE  
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21  
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.  
You may:  
Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution  
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).  
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.  
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.  
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not  
be used for replacement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 197  
1. Remove the three upper fascia screws.  
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside  
Bulb No.  
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007  
Front Park/ Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457AK  
Front Side Marker Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899  
Center High Mounted Stop Light  
(CHMSL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W  
Rear Tail/ Stop/ Turn Signal Light . . . . . . 3157–P27/7W  
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W  
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
Headlight Bulb Replacement  
7
CAUTION!  
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your  
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten  
bulb life.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Remove two screws from the headlight assembly and  
remove the assembly from the vehicle.  
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.  
4. Remove the retaining ring and replace the bulb.  
NOTE: The headlight assembly is located to the fender  
by a molded pin. Pull the outboard side of the headlight  
straight out until the molded pin clears the fender, then  
slide the headlight out from behind the bumper fascia  
and grille.  
CAUTION!  
During installation, be sure when tightening the  
inboard screw, to only tighten until the rubber  
grommet on the screw starts to compress against the  
headlamp module housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 199  
Front Park/Turn Signal Lights  
Tail/Stop, Rear Turn Signals and Back-up Lights  
1. Remove the headlight assembly  
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/ 4 turn and remove.  
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and replace.  
Front Sidemarker Light  
1. Open the trunk and move the trunk liner away from  
the rear light mounting area.  
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/ 4 turn to remove it from the  
housing.  
3. Pull bulb from socket and replace  
1. Remove the screws and push-pins from the front  
fender splash shield.  
Center High Mounted Stop Light  
1. Twist the socket 1/ 4 turn and remove it from the  
housing.  
2. Reach between the fender and the splash shield, grasp  
the bulb and socket assembly and turn it counterclock-  
wise. Remove the bulb and socket assembly from the  
light housing.  
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.  
7
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.  
Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly and replace the  
fender splash shield.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES  
U.S.  
Metric  
Fuel (Approximate)  
Standard 2.0L Engines 87 Octane  
High Output 2.0L Engines 91 Octane  
Engine Oil-With Filter  
12.5 Gallons  
12.5 Gallons  
47.5 Liters  
47.5 Liters  
2.0 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-30, API Certified Engine Oils)  
Cooling System *  
4.5 qts  
6.5 qts  
4.3 Liters  
6.2 Liters  
2.0 Liter Engines (MoparAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000  
Mile Formula)  
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 201  
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS  
Engine  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
Engine Coolant  
MoparAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-  
ganic Additive Technology)  
Engine Oil  
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil. Refer to oil viscosity chart for cor-  
rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.  
Engine Oil Filter  
Spark Plugs  
Mopar 4105409 or equiv.  
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-  
partment.  
Fuel Selection  
91 Octane for 2.0L H.O. and 87 Octane for 2.0L Standard Engine.  
Chassis  
7
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.  
Automatic Transmission  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
Brake Master Cylinder  
MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.  
MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.  
MoparDOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not  
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.  
Power Steering Reservoir  
MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
CONTENTS  
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 204  
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Schedule “B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
204 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE  
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold  
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to  
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission  
control system. These, and all other maintenance services  
included in this manual, should be done to provide best  
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-  
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating  
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip  
driving.  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
There are two maintenance schedules that show the  
required service for your vehicle.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated  
under the conditions that are listed below and at the  
beginning of the schedule.  
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).  
Stop and go driving.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Extensive engine idling.  
Inspection and service also should be done any time a  
malfunction is suspected.  
Driving in dusty conditions.  
E
S
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the  
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle  
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-  
ment or individual using any automotive part which has  
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of  
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).  
8
More than 50% of your driving is sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).  
Trailer towing.†छ  
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser-  
vices).†छ  
Off-road or desert operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 205  
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
At Each Stop for Fuel  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully  
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while  
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-  
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the  
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule “Bof the  
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions  
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ.  
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if  
required.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not  
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-  
ule ЉBЉ.  
Once a Month  
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or  
damage.  
E
S
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-  
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the  
interval that occurs first.  
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals  
as required.  
8
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake  
master cylinder, power steering and transaxle and add  
as needed.  
CAUTION!  
Failure to perform the required maintenance items  
may result in damage to the vehicle.  
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
206 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for  
proper fit.  
Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug  
condition.  
At Each Oil Change  
Change the engine oil filter.  
Inspect the exhaust system.  
Inspect the brake hoses.  
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.  
Rotate the tires at each oil change interval shown on  
Schedule “A” 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or every other  
interval shown on Schedule “B” 6,000 miles (10 000  
km).  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-  
nents.  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 207  
Schedule “B”  
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle  
under one or more of the following conditions.  
Trailer towing.† छ  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).†  
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every  
60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated  
under one or more of the conditions marked with an .  
Off-road or desert operation.  
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles (77  
000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one or  
more of the conditions marked with an †.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule “Bof the  
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).  
Stop and go driving.  
E
S
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil  
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-  
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
Extensive engine idling.  
8
Driving in dusty conditions.  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).  
More than 50% of your driving is sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
208 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
3,000  
(5 000)  
X
6,000  
(10 000)  
X
9,000  
(14 000)  
X
12,000  
(19 000)  
X
15,000  
(24 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
X
Inspect and replace, if required, the make-up air  
filter (located inside the air cleaner).  
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect and replace, if required, the air cleaner ele-  
ment (filter). *  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 209  
Miles  
18,000  
(29 000)  
X
21,000  
(34 000)  
X
24,000  
(38 000)  
X
27,000  
30,000  
(48 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers )  
(43 000)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
X
Replace air cleaner element (filter).  
X
X
X
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *  
Adjust the generator belt tension.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside the  
air cleaner).  
Replace the spark plugs.  
X
X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seal.  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
210 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
33,000  
(53 000)  
X
36,000  
(58 000)  
X
39,000  
(62 000)  
X
42,000  
(67 000)  
X
45,000  
(72 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
X
X
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the air cleaner  
element (filter). *  
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect and replace, if required, the make-up air  
filter (located inside the air cleaner).  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 211  
Miles  
48,000  
(77 000)  
X
51,000  
(82 000)  
X
54,000  
57,000  
60,000  
(96 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
(86 000 )  
(91 000)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
Replace air cleaner element (filter).  
X
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and adjust the  
bands.छ  
X
Replace manual transaxle fluid.†  
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.  
Replace the drive belts.  
X
X
X
X
E
S
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside the  
air cleaner).  
8
Replace the spark plugs.  
X
X
Replace the ignition cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
212 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
63,000  
66,000  
69,000  
72,000  
75,000  
(120 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
( Kilometers)  
(101 000) (106 000 ) (110 000 )  
(115 000)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the air cleaner  
element (filter). *  
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect and replace, if required, the make-up air  
filter (located inside the air cleaner).  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 213  
Miles  
78,000  
81,000  
84,000  
87,000  
90,000  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
(125 000) (130 000 ) (134 000 ) (139 000 ) (144 000)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
Replace air cleaner element (filter).  
X
X
X
X
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡  
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.  
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside the  
air cleaner).  
Replace the spark plugs.  
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
214 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
93,000  
(149 000)  
X
96,000  
(154 000)  
X
99,000  
102,000  
(163 000)  
X
105,000  
(168 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
(158 000 )  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the air cleaner  
element (filter). *  
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace manual transaxle fluid.†  
Flush and replace the engine coolant.  
Replace the engine timing belt.  
X
X
X
X
Inspect and replace, if required, the make-up air  
filter (located inside the air cleaner).  
E
S
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,  
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.  
8
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime  
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-  
ceipts.  
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,  
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 215  
Schedule “A”  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Miles  
6,000  
(10 000)  
[6]  
12,000  
18,000  
24,000  
30,000  
36,000  
(Kilometers)  
(19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000) (58 000)  
[Months]  
[12]  
[18]  
X
[24]  
[30]  
[36]  
X
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the brake linings.  
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace the spark plugs.  
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside  
the air cleaner).  
X
X
E
S
Adjust generator drive belt tension  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
216 SCHEDULE “A”  
Miles  
42,000  
(67 000)  
[42]  
48,000  
(77 000)  
[48]  
54,000  
(86 000)  
[54]  
60,000  
(96 000)  
[60]  
66,000  
(106 000)  
[66]  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the brake linings.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.  
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.  
Inspect the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*  
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months,  
regardless of mileage.  
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside the air  
cleaner).  
X
X
E
S
8
Replace drive belts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 217  
Miles  
72,000  
78,000  
84,000  
90,000  
96,000  
102,000  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)  
(115 000)  
(125  
000)  
(134  
000)  
(144  
000)  
(154 000)  
(160  
000)  
[Months]  
[72]  
X
[78]  
[84]  
[90]  
X
[96]  
[102]  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front brake pads and rear brake linings  
and rotors.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace the spark plugs.  
X
X
X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.  
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not  
required if previously changed. * ‡  
X
X
E
S
Replace the make-up air filter (located inside the  
air cleaner).  
8
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.  
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months,  
regardless of mileage.  
X
X
Replace engine timing belt.  
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
218 SCHEDULE “A”  
WARNING!  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If  
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a  
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-  
chanic.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
CONTENTS  
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
MoparParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire  
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  
YOUR VEHICLE  
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable  
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-  
pointment.  
Prepare For The Appointment  
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the  
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All  
work to be performed may not be covered by the  
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service  
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles  
service history. This can often provide a clue to the  
current problem.  
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in  
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our  
products and services.  
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to  
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or  
related matter that you may experience. The manufactur-  
ers dealers have the facilities, factory-trained techni-  
cians, special tools, and the latest information to assure  
your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.  
The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make  
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not  
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a  
decision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstance  
occurs that requires information from the manufacturer,  
we have asked the dealers service management to make  
the contact on your behalf.  
Prepare A List  
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the  
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident,  
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the  
service advisor know.  
Be Reasonable With Requests  
If you list a number of items, and you must have your  
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with  
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.  
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 221  
This is why you should always talk to your dealers  
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with  
this process.  
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center  
P.O. Box 1621  
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6  
Phone —(800) 465–2001  
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the  
general manager or owner of the dealership. They  
want to know if you need assistance.  
In Mexico contact:  
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240  
Sante Fe C.P. 05109  
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you  
may contact the Manufacturers Customer Center.  
Mexico, D. F.  
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240  
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240  
Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer  
Center should include the following information:  
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  
Impaired (TDD/TTY)  
Owners name and address  
Owners telephone number (home and office)  
Dealership name  
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the  
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-  
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer  
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who  
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter  
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the  
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.  
Vehicle identification number  
Vehicle delivery date and mileage  
9
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer  
Center  
P.O. Box 21–8004  
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004  
Phone: (800) 992-1997  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Service Contract  
We appreciate that you have made a major investment  
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has  
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and  
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with  
your ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their  
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  
concerns.  
You may have purchased a service contract for your  
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-  
pected repairs after your manufacturers new vehicle  
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-  
hind only the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you  
purchased a manufacturers Service Contract, you will  
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card  
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery  
date. If you have any questions about your service  
contract, call the manufacturers Service Contract Na-  
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.  
WARRANTY INFORMATION  
See your manufacturers Warranty Information Booklet  
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of  
warranty.  
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service  
contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It  
is not responsible for any service contract other than the  
manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a  
service contract that is not a manufacturers Service  
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-  
ers new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to  
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in  
those documents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 223  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
MOPARPARTS  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-  
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of  
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also  
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
Moparfluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are  
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your  
vehicle operating at its best.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you  
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause  
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately  
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-  
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.  
In Canada:  
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you  
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-  
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety  
defect to the Canadian government should write to  
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations  
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B  
3V9.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the  
manufacturer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 225  
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS  
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-  
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show  
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,  
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability  
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list  
of all tools and equipment.  
To order the following manuals, you may use either the  
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-  
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-  
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call  
for an order form.  
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering  
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).  
Owner’s Manuals.  
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance  
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you  
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are  
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-  
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and  
safety tips.  
Service Manuals.  
These comprehensive service manuals provide the  
information that students and professional technicians  
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,  
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge  
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in  
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams  
and charts.  
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143  
(Canada)  
9
Or  
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:  
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.  
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com  
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals  
or  
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,  
these practical manuals make it easy for students and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM  
TIRE QUALITY GRADES  
Traction Grades  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and  
C, and they represent the tires ability to stop on wet  
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on  
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con-  
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-  
mance.  
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-  
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-  
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tires  
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall  
of the tires on your car.  
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety  
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.  
WARNING!  
Treadwear  
The traction grade is based on braking (straight-  
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering  
(turning) performance.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-  
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-  
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1  
1/ 2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road  
characteristics and climate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 227  
Temperature Grades  
WARNING!  
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, repre-  
senting the tires resistance to the generation of heat and  
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the  
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C  
corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-  
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent  
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel  
than the minimum required by law.  
The temperature grade is established for a tire that is  
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive  
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup  
and possible tire failure.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230 INDEX  
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 182  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Air Cleaner, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,176  
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,47,80  
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,80  
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Alterations/ Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,201  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Arming Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Ashtrays and Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 9,114,116,117,187  
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,116  
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 231  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,185  
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,185  
Brake/ Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 46  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,197  
CD Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Central Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Cleaning  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Compact Disc Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . 200  
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Caps, Filler  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 98  
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,86  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,92,93,99  
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,91  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232 INDEX  
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,200,201  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,183  
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183  
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 174  
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,103,106  
Deploying, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Disposal  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Driving  
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Emergency, In Case of  
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 233  
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 167,204  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,200,201  
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,145  
Exhaust Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Filters  
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,201  
Flashers  
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Fluid Level Checks  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,78  
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,201  
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234 INDEX  
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Gauges  
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Ignition  
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,21  
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,77,78  
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 235  
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62  
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,78  
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 42  
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,197  
Lighter, Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,47,80  
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236 INDEX  
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,79,199  
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . 78  
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,114,119,189  
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Map/ Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Compass/ Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Modifications/ Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,224  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,204  
Maintenance, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Schedule ЉAЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Schedule ЉBЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,167  
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Odometer  
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,200  
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 237  
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,200  
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,167  
Operator Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,109  
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Owners Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,225  
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 129  
Power  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,177  
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,84,89  
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,89  
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
10  
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238 INDEX  
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,80  
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,21  
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Side Window Demisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,109  
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 28  
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 239  
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,82  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,77  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Steering  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 31  
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 129  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,133,226  
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130  
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,133  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Temperature Control, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 82,153  
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 INDEX  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Towing  
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Transaxle  
Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,147  
Vehicle Modifications/ Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,114,116,117,187  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,67,114,119,189  
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Trunk Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,79  
Warning Lights  
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 241  
Windows  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Windshield Washer Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Wiring, Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Cisco Systems Network Router 301 User Manual
Coustic Car Stereo System RX 779 User Manual
Cub Cadet Snow Blower 1345 SWE User Manual
Cypress Computer Hardware CY14E108N User Manual
Dimplex Fan CFS120 User Manual
Fellowes Paper Shredder 420CC User Manual
Fisher Price Motorized Toy Car W9418 User Manual
Fundex Games Games One Word User Manual
GE Air Conditioner AGF06 User Manual
Gefen Log Splitter EXT MHDMI13 148 User Manual